Horn Strobe PDF

TABLE OF CONTENTS
TAB NUMBER SECTION NAME
1 Data Sheet / Component List
2 Scope of Work by Contractor
3 Chil-Pak Drawings
a) General Dimensions (MH-100)
b) Chil-Pak P&ID (MP-100)
c) Make up (MP-140)
d) Chil-Pak Electrical Power Distribution (EP-100)
e) Chil-Pak Lighting & Service Outlets (EP-160)
4 Chiller, Pump Performance, and Heat Exchanger
5 Cooling Tower Selection & Related Components (BY OTHERS)
6 Internal Components
(Fan Coil / Expansion Tanks / Pot Feeders / Air Separators / Exhaust Fan / Manual
Valves / Suction Diffusers / Triple Duty Valves / Wye Strainers / Lighting /
Backflow Preventer / Pressure Relief Valve / Pressure Reducing Valve / Glycol
Management Unit / Mini Split DX
7 Controls & Related Components / Sequence of Operation
8 Warranty / Validation Letter / Start Up Documents
9 Reports
( MSDS Sheets)
Project: Eight Flags CCHP- Fernandina Beach, FL

TAB 1
DATA SHEET / COMPONENT LIST

Project: Eight Flags Energy – Fernandina Beach, Florida
Model: 850 Ton Single Chiller - Variable Primary Flow
CHILLED WATER
Total Capacity 850 Tons
Entering CHW Temperature 60° F
Leaving CHW Temperature 50° F
Fluid Type Water with 30% Propylene Glycol
Fluid Flow Rate 2120 GPM
Total Head Pressure 210’ Head Total
Chiller One (1) Carrier 19XRV centrifugal chillers
Refrigerant R-134a
Evaporator Tubes Super E3, 1”, 0.025” Copper
Condenser Tubes Spike Fin 3, 0.025” Copper
Unit KW/Ton at ARI Conditions 0.518 Full Load
Unit NPLV at ARI Conditions 0.303 kW/ton (Chiller only at design conditions)
Heat Exchanger Shells ASME Section B
Flat Plate Heat Exchangers Mueller AT80MH/HV, 1100 gpm, hot side 98.3/87.0 ° F, cold side
85.0/96.2° F
CONDENSER WATER
Fluid Type Water
Fluid Entering Temperature 85° F
Fluid Leaving Temperature 94.18° F
Fluid Flow Rate 2120 GPM
Total Pressure 65’ Head Total
COOLING TOWER (If Optional ADD #4 taken)

Mounting Field installed on remote platform
Model Marley 8409UAN2, dual cell
Fan Motor Two (2) 50hp inverter duty motors
Variable Frequency Drive Two (2) 50hp with electronic by-pass and service switch
Included Cooling Tower Options Vibration switch, bypass connection, ladder/platform, float level control, all
316 SS construction, sump sweeper piping, high flow eductors
Basin Cleaning System Puroflux PF064-040B, 10 hp
SYSTEM PUMPS
Chilled Water Pump (Chiller to Turbine Inlet) Two (2) 100hp Armstrong split coupled end suction w/VFD, 1060 gpm @ 210’,
ODP
Condenser Water Pump (Chiller to Cooling Tower) Two (2) 30hp Armstrong split coupled end suction w/VFD, 1287 gpm @ 65’.
ODP
Machine Cooling Tower Water Pump (Tower to HX) Two (2) 25hp Armstrong split coupled end suction w/NEMA 4X VFD, 1100
GPM, 65’, fully redundant, TEFC w/space heater, shipped loose for field
installation
Machine Cooling Turbine Water Pump (HX to Turbine) Two (2) 100hp Armstrong split coupled end suction w/NEMA 4X VFD, 1100
GPM, 185’, fully redundant, TEFC w/space heater, shipped loose for field
installation
Page 1 of 3 Project: Eight Flags Energy – Fernandina Beach, FL

ELECTRICAL
Listing and Label ETL Labeled in accordance with UL 1995
Power Connection Single (1) Point Power feed*
Total System MCA 1064.8 Amps
*Some field termination of wiring is required by contractor. See Scope of Work section for details.
UNIT DIMENSIONS
Length x Width x Height (Overall) 40’ x 13’-6” x 12’–8” (Chil-Pak only), see MH-100 drawing for details
Shipping Weight
Chil-Pak / Cooling Tower 75,000/27,775 lbs
Total Operating Weight
Chil-Pak / Cooling Tower 80,000/61,679 lbs
UNIT CONSTRUCTION SUMMARY

Manufacturing Certification ISO 9001:2008
Roof Pitched 1” per foot Sarnafil membrane
Base Frame Welded C-Channel
Flooring ¼” steel tread plate, painted
Floor Drains At pumps; evaporator & condenser tubes
Drain Piping Type L Copper, see MH-100 drawing for locations
Wall/Roof Panels 2” insulated/3” insulated
Panels Exterior 16ga Pre-painted G-90 Galvanized Steel
Panels Interior Liner 20ga G-90 Galvanized Steel
Cabinet Insulation 3” Certified R-10 Equivalent
Roof Insulation 3” R-16
Access Doors Lockable, Hinged Double Wall Insulated with compression latches, removable
roof hatch for easy chiller compressor access
Exterior Paint Epoxy Powder Coating; Salt Spray & Humidity (750hrs), entire cabinet coated
with Diamond Clad Clear Coat urethane for additional corrosion protection
Structural Steel Paint Three step coating on all structural steel identical to that used on ocean going
ships: first a zinc rich primer, second an epoxy and third a polyurethane top
coat
SPECIFIED INTERNAL COMPONENTS

Chiller Insulation 3/4” Armaflex
Chilled water piping 2 ½” and larger Black steel pipe, Schedule 40, ASTM A 53B, Welded or Mechanical/grooved
with standard weight fittings
Chilled water piping 2” and smaller Black steel pipe; Schedule 40; Class 150 malleable iron fittings with threaded
joints
Makeup water, refrigerant vent Type L copper
Pipe Insulation, Jacketing, Labeling Preformed fiberglass (ASTM C 177, K value 0.29) w/PVC Jacket and labels,
chilled water only
Glycol Feeder Armstrong GLA Standard
Make-up water and double check valve Included
Refrigerant monitor/Exhaust System Sherlock 102 with IR sensor
Expansion Tanks Armstrong A-400L bladder type, 106 gallon acceptance

Control Interface BACnet internal to Chil-Pak, MODBUS TCP/IP external
Controls Automated Logic
Electrical Panels General Electric Spectra Series
VFDs ABB ACH550, no bypass unless specifically indicated on drawings or stated
elsewhere
Exit Lighting (battery powered) Included
Chemical Treatment Equipment By Others, 1” taps w/quarter turn ball valves installed
Factory Representative. Start-up, commissioning, training Forty (40) hours included, single visit, normal work hours M-F
Unit Warranty (Parts Only) One (1) year from startup or 18 months from shipment whichever comes first
Chiller Warranty Five (5) year total parts and labor
Exhaust Fan Greenheck SQ-160-A

Table of Chil-Pak Components
COMPONENTS BRAND MODEL
Chillers Carrier 19XRV6Z6647DLFH64
Pumps Armstrong 4030 Series
Cooling Tower Marley By Others
Electric Panels General Electric Various Spectra Series
Exhaust Fan Greenheck SQ-160-A
Refrigerant Monitor & Alarm Sherlock SHER102
Variable Frequency Drives ABB ACH550-UH
Pot Feeders GTP FB5/QC-AC
Air Separator Armstrong VA-8
Expansion Tanks Armstrong A-400L
Strainer Gruvlok Model 768G Wye Strainer
Butterfly Valves Gruvlok Series 7700
Suction Guides Gruvlok Figure 7250
BAS Interface By Others
Heat Exchangers Mueller AT80MH/HV
Control Valves Belimo Various
Project: Job Name – City, State

TAB 2
SCOPE OF WORK BY CONTRACTOR

Scope of Work (Field Installation Requirements)
Clarification Notes
The packaged equipment requires some field assembly, and certain materials and labor are required by the installing MEP
contractor which may or may not be specifically delineated here. The equipment listed above is factory integrated as much
as possible; however additional project specific clarifications are provided below:
(1) Conduit and wiring as well as field termination of the vibration switches, fan motors, fan VFDs, centrifugal
separators and CW valves back to disconnects/J-boxes mounted on the Chil-Pak plant exterior is NOT included and
is the responsibility of the contractor, and must be completed after the cooling towers are installed. Associated
labor, materials and crane for installation of cooling tower(s) including all items shipped loose and/or needed in
order to finish/terminate connections (mechanical, plumbing and electrical) remain the responsibility of the
Contractor.
(2) Connection and installation of all needed CW pipes, spool pieces, valves, centrifugal separators and other
hardware between the CTs and Chil-Pak plant, including hardware, labor and materials is the responsibility of the
contractor.
(3) One (1) 460 V line (three phase) is required to be brought to the factory provided breaker panel at Chil-Pak. All
power distribution and voltage transforming is accomplished through the plant’s internal power distribution system.
(4) Field installation/wiring for any sensors located outside the Chil-Pak plant enclosures, including but not limited to
the remote differential pressure sensor is required by the Contractor.
(5) Installation of the two heat exchangers and associated pumps and hydronic accessories is the responsibility of the
installing contractor.
Pre-construction coordination and installation instructions and support will be provided throughout the submittal,
installation and commissioning phases of the project. Details and availability will be coordinated with the installing
contractor
Responsibilities of the installing contractor and/or sub-contractor(s) that are NOT included:
Installation ~ Mechanical
1. Crane for off-loading and setting equipment at the site. Rigging instructions (not personnel or equipment) provided
by factory.
2. Level (steel or concrete) mounting pad for Chil-Pak module. Leveling equipment with shims by contractor.
3. Labor and materials to connect Chil-Pak CHW connections to turbine inlet CHW piping.
4. Labor and materials to install the cooling towers, basin cleaning system.
5. Labor and materials to install the two heat exchangers, associated pumps and hydronic accessories.
6. Provide required chemicals; connect chemical equipment, filters and other consumables after arrival at site.
7. Start-up of chiller components must be preceded by confirmation of water, electrical, cleaning-purging of hydronic
system and equipment leveling by Contractor(s).
Electrical
8. Labor and materials to connect Chil-Pak to building electrical feeds. One (1) 460V/3P/60 Hz line needs to be run
to the Chil-Pak module. All power distribution is accomplished through the internal power distribution system.
(Page 1 of 2 ) Project: Eight Flags CCHP – Fernandina Beach, FL

9. Labor and materials to connect control wiring between CT(s) and Chil-Pak module. Control junction box
connections are factory provided on equipment.
10. Labor and materials to connect control wiring (if necessary) from the HX control valves and pump VFDs to junction
box provided on the exterior of the Chil-Pak.
11. Conduit and wiring of the vibration switches, fan motors and fan VFDs back to a disconnects/J-boxes mounted on
the Chil-Pak is not included, and must be field terminated after cooling towers are installed
Plumbing
12. Labor and materials to connect Chil-Pak to building CHW piping.
13. Terminate all drain connections from enclosures and CTs to floor type drains (labor and materials must be provided
by others)
14. Connect water line to Chil-Pak and CT make-up water connections (labor and materials must be provided by others)
Building Controls ~ Integration

15. Provide necessary controllers and programming for proper operation of the Chil-Pak. Chil-Pak will supply a
sequence of operation and points list.
16. Control integration between Chil-Pak plant and the building is the responsibility of the Building Controls
Contractor.
17. Control wiring between CT(s) and Chil-Pak plant modules (labor and materials must be provided by others). CT
control junction box connections are factory provided on equipment.
18. Field installation/wiring for any sensors located outside the Chil-Pak enclosure is required by the Contractor
19. Internet connection (provided by others) to the Chil-Pak control panel may be used allow remote controls support. If
this connection is desired, all connection related items must be provided by others.
Service
20. Provide required chemicals, connect chemical equipment, and chemical service (must be provided by others),
filters and other consumables as well as loss of refrigerant after arrival at site
21. Preventative maintenance and service, changes to controls after commissioning, investigative or emergency calls
are NOT covered in this quotation.
(Page 2 of 2 ) Project: Eight Flags CCHP – Fernandina Beach, FL

TAB 3
CHIL-PAK UNIT, PIPING & ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
a) Plan & Elevation View (MH-100)

b) P&ID (MP-100)
c) Make Up( MP-140)
d) Electrical Power Distribution Panel BP-1 (EP-100)
e) Low Voltage Power Distribution (EP-160)
TO MP-100
FROM CITY
1 2
3 4
TAB 4
CHILLER, PUMPS, HEAT EXCHANGERS

AquaEdge Chiller Performance Outputs
Project Name: 425 Tons 23XRV 01/14/2020
Sales Office: Sigler El Paso 10:28 AM
Tag Name: 425 Tons XRV_Sel01
Rated with AHRI Standard 550/590 (I-P)
Chiller Weights
Chiller Model 23XRV3232NRVR450- Total Rigging Weight 16711 lb
Starter / VFD VFD - Unit Mounted (STD Tier) Total Operating Weight 17933 lb
Refrigerant Type R-134a Refrigerant Weight 650 lb
Isolation Valve Installed Condenser
Automatic Hot Gas Bypass Installed Size 32
Operation Type Cooling Waterbox Type Nozzle-in-Head, 150 psi
Cooler Passes 2
Size 32 Nozzle Arrangement R (Nozzles on Drive End)
Waterbox Type Nozzle-in-Head, 150 psi Tubing Spike Fin III (SPK3), .025 in, Copper
Passes 2 Fluid Type Fresh Water
Nozzle Arrangement C (Nozzles on Drive End) Fouling Factor(hr-sqft-F)/BTU 0.000250
Tubing Super E3 (SUPE3), .025 in, Copper Motor
Fluid Type Propylene Glycol, 30 % Size V (R comp)
Fouling Factor(hr-sqft-F)/BTU 0.000100 Line Voltage/Hertz (VFD Line Side) 460-3-60
Compressor Flow Controls
Size R (FL Opt.) Flasc Orifice 25
Economizer No
Output Type Full Load (I-P) Part Load (I-P) Part Load (I-P) Part Load (I-P) Part Load (I-P) Part Load (I-P) Part Load (I-P) Part Load (I-P) Part Load (I-P) Part Load (I-P)
Percent Load 100.00 90.00 80.00 70.00 60.00 50.00 40.00 30.00 20.00 10.00
Chiller Capacity 425.0 tonR 382.5 tonR 340.0 tonR 297.5 tonR 255.0 tonR 212.5 tonR 170.0 tonR 127.5 tonR 85.00 tonR 42.50 tonR
Chiller Input kW 226.7 kW 194.9 kW 167.0 kW 142.3 kW 120.1 kW 99.90 kW 83.60 kW 68.00 kW 54.10 kW 41.10 kW
Chiller Efficiency 0.5333 kW/tonR 0.5096 kW/tonR 0.4911 kW/tonR 0.4783 kW/tonR 0.4709 kW/tonR 0.4703 kW/tonR 0.4920 kW/tonR 0.5336 kW/tonR 0.6369 kW/tonR 0.9672 kW/tonR
Chiller COPR 6.594 kW/kW 6.901 kW/kW 7.161 kW/kW 7.352 kW/kW 7.468 kW/kW 7.478 kW/kW 7.148 kW/kW 6.590 kW/kW 5.522 kW/kW 3.636 kW/kW
Cooler
Entering Temp. 60.00 F 59.00 F 58.00 F 57.00 F 56.00 F 55.00 F 54.00 F 53.00 F 52.00 F 51.00 F
Leaving Temp. 50.00 F 50.00 F 50.00 F 50.00 F 50.00 F 50.00 F 50.00 F 50.00 F 50.00 F 50.00 F
Flow Rate 1,069 gpm 1,069 gpm 1,069 gpm 1,069 gpm 1,069 gpm 1,069 gpm 1,069 gpm 1,069 gpm 1,069 gpm 1,069 gpm
Pressure Drop 36.8 ft H2O 36.9 ft H2O 37.0 ft H2O 37.1 ft H2O 37.2 ft H2O 37.3 ft H2O 37.4 ft H2O 37.5 ft H2O 37.6 ft H2O 37.7 ft H2O
Condenser
Leaving Temp. 95.00 F 93.97 F 92.94 F 91.93 F 90.93 F 89.94 F 88.98 F 88.02 F 87.07 F 86.13 F
Entering Temp. 85.00 F 85.00 F 85.00 F 85.00 F 85.00 F 85.00 F 85.00 F 85.00 F 85.00 F 85.00 F
Flow Rate 1,179 gpm 1,179 gpm 1,179 gpm 1,179 gpm 1,179 gpm 1,179 gpm 1,179 gpm 1,179 gpm 1,179 gpm 1,179 gpm
AquaEdge Chiller Builder v5.01 Page 1 of 2

AquaEdge Chiller Performance Outputs
Project Name: 425 Tons 23XRV 01/14/2020
Sales Office: Sigler El Paso 10:28 AM
Pressure Drop 25.0 ft H2O 25.1 ft H2O 25.1 ft H2O 25.1 ft H2O 25.1 ft H2O 25.2 ft H2O 25.2 ft H2O 25.2 ft H2O 25.2 ft H2O 25.3 ft H2O
Motor
Motor Rated Load Amps 388.1 373.8 361.0 348.9 336.9 328.2 322.2 311.6 305.9 305.3
Chiller Rated Line Amps 333 303 270 240 211 183 159 135 112 91
Chiller Inrush Amps 333
Max Fuse/CB Amps 700
Min Circuit Ampacity 416
Messages:
This unit complies with the efficiency requirements of ASHRAE Standard 90.1.
Certified in accordance with the AHRI Water-Cooled Water-Chilling and Heat Pump Water-Heating Packages Certification Program, which is based on AHRI Standard 550/590 (I-P) and AHRI
( 1) Standard 551/591 (SI). Unit containing freeze protection fluids in the condenser or in the evaporator with a leaving chilled fluid temperature above 32°F [0°C] is certified when rated per the
Standard with water. Certified units may be found in the AHRI Directory at www.ahridirectory.org.
AquaEdge Chiller Builder v5.01 Page 2 of 2

Customer : James, Cooke & Pump Performance Datasheet
Hobson Encompass 2.0 - 19.5.4
Project name : FLUTEC PUMPS
2015
Item number : 002 Size : 382B-SC - 5x5x11A
Service : Stages :1
Quantity :1 Based on curve number : 382B_5x5x11A_1800 Rev 0
Quote number : FLUTEC PUMPS 2015 Basic model number : 5x5x11A 382B-SC 1800-CL
Date last saved : 14 Jan 2020 6:20 PM
Operating Conditions Liquid

Flow, rated : 808.0 USgpm Liquid type : Water
Differential head / pressure, rated (requested) : 90.00 ft Additional liquid description :
Differential head / pressure, rated (actual) : 91.80 ft Solids diameter, max : 0.00 in
Suction pressure, rated / max : 0.00 / 0.00 psi.g Solids diameter limit : 1.06 in
NPSH available, rated : Ample Solids concentration, by volume : 0.00 %
Frequency : 60 Hz Temperature, max : 68.00 deg F
Performance Fluid density, rated / max : 1.000 / 1.000 SG
Speed, rated : 1800 rpm Viscosity, rated : 1.00 cP
Impeller diameter, rated : 10.50 in Vapor pressure, rated : 0.34 psi.a
Impeller diameter, maximum : 11.00 in Material
Impeller diameter, minimum : 9.00 in Material selected : Standard
Efficiency : 75.26 % Pressure Data
PEI (CL) : 1.00 Maximum working pressure : 51.22 psi.g
NPSH required / margin required : 13.35 / 0.00 ft Maximum allowable working pressure : 278.2 psi.g
nq (imp. eye flow) / S (imp. eye flow) : 27 / 169 Metric units Maximum allowable suction pressure : 175.0 psi.g
Minimum Continuous Stable Flow : 312.6 USgpm Hydrostatic test pressure : 125.0 psi.g
Head, maximum, rated diameter : 118.3 ft Driver & Power Data (@Max density)
Head rise to shutoff : 30.66 %
Driver sizing specification : Max Power
Flow, best eff. point : 708.6 USgpm
Margin over specification : 0.00 %
Flow ratio, rated / BEP : 114.03 %
Service factor : 1.00
Diameter ratio (rated / max) : 95.45 %
Power, hydraulic : 18.36 hp
Head ratio (rated dia / max dia) : 83.41 %
Power, rated : 24.39 hp
Cq/Ch/Ce/Cn [ANSI/HI 9.6.7-2010] : 1.00 / 1.00 / 1.00 / 1.00
Power, maximum, rated diameter : 26.03 hp
Selection status : Acceptable
Minimum recommended motor rating : 30.00 hp / 22.37 kW
Curve efficiencies are typical. For guaranteed values, contact factory
150
Minimum Continuous Stable Flow
Max allowable flow
135 11.00 in 60 Preferred operating region
66
71
74
76
120
77
10.50 in
105 76
74
90 71
Head - ft
75 9.00 in 66
25.0 hp 30.0 hp
60 15.0 hp
20.0 hp 60
45
30
15
80
NPSH3 - ft
NPSH3
40
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,100 1,200 1,300
Flow - USgpm
JAMES, COOKE AND HOBSON INC. PHONE: · FAX:

· ,
Encompass 2.0 - 19.5.4
General Arrangement Drawing

Pump Data
Series 380 Discharge Size 5.00 in
Model 382B-SC Suction Size 5.00 in
Size 5x5x11A Impeller Diameter 10.50 in
Flow 808.0 USgpm Pressure Rating 19.18 psi
Head 90.00 ft Temperature Rating 68.00 deg F
RPM 1800 RPM Connection Suc/Dis Flanged 125#/125#
Rotation Right Base Type 4" Pipe Flange Support
Pump Paint Standard blue paint Coupling Type High Strength Aluminum
Motor Data
Power 30.00 hp - -
Phase 3 Efficiency (%) Not available
Frequency 60 Hz Efficiency Rating premium
Volts 230/460 Enclosure ODP
RPM 1800 Manufacturer Weg
Frame 286TC
Pump Materials of Construction

Pump Material Stainless fitted Motor Bracket Cast iron ASTM A48
Casing Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Seal Type Type 21
Impeller Stainless Steel Type 316 Seal Material Carbon Ceramic
Shaft Stainless Steel 416 Impeller Wear Ring -
Shaft Sleeve -
Estimated Weights
Pump 330.0 lb
Driver 405.0 lb
Total 735.0 lb
Additional Options
-
-
Drain Tap -
X DC DE DH YY VD AG BW
Size
14.75 7.43 9.70 30.27 14.25 13.13 23.00 6.00 0.50
Quote Information
Customer James, Cooke & Hobson
NOTES:
Customer Quote # 1095898
All dimensions are in inches.
Job Name FLUTEC PUMPS 2015
Dimensions may vary ± 1/4" (6mm) due to normal manufacturing tolerances.
Market Commercial
Conduit box is shown in approximate postion. Dimensions are not specified as they vary with each motor manufacturer.
Quote Item # 002
Dimension BW is clearance requred for servicing.
Quote Date 15 Jan 2020
Customer : James, Cooke & Pump Performance Datasheet
Hobson Encompass 2.0 - 19.5.4
Project name : FLUTEC PUMPS
2015
Item number : 001 Size : 382B-SC - 6x6x11
Service : Stages :1
Quantity :1 Based on curve number : 382B_6x6x11_1800
Quote number : FLUTEC PUMPS 2015 Basic model number : 6x6x11 382B 1800-CL
Date last saved : 10 Jan 2020 5:04 PM
Operating Conditions Liquid

Flow, rated : 945.0 USgpm Liquid type : Water
Differential head / pressure, rated (requested) : 95.60 ft Additional liquid description :
Differential head / pressure, rated (actual) : 96.69 ft Solids diameter, max : 0.00 in
Suction pressure, rated / max : 0.00 / 0.00 psi.g Solids diameter limit : 0.50 in
NPSH available, rated : Ample Solids concentration, by volume : 0.00 %
Frequency : 60 Hz Temperature, max : 68.00 deg F
Performance Fluid density, rated / max : 1.000 / 1.000 SG
Speed, rated : 1800 rpm Viscosity, rated : 1.00 cP
Impeller diameter, rated : 10.06 in Vapor pressure, rated : 0.34 psi.a
Impeller diameter, maximum : 11.00 in Material
Impeller diameter, minimum : 9.00 in Material selected : Standard
Efficiency : 79.47 % Pressure Data
PEI (CL) : 0.96 Maximum working pressure : 46.33 psi.g
NPSH required / margin required : 10.42 / 0.00 ft Maximum allowable working pressure : 278.2 psi.g
nq (imp. eye flow) / S (imp. eye flow) : 36 / 190 Metric units Maximum allowable suction pressure : 175.0 psi.g
Minimum Continuous Stable Flow : 523.0 USgpm Hydrostatic test pressure : 125.0 psi.g
Head, maximum, rated diameter : 107.1 ft Driver & Power Data (@Max density)
Head rise to shutoff : 11.05 %
Driver sizing specification : Max Power
Flow, best eff. point : 1,161.1 USgpm
Margin over specification : 0.00 %
Flow ratio, rated / BEP : 81.39 %
Service factor : 1.00
Diameter ratio (rated / max) : 91.48 %
Power, hydraulic : 22.81 hp
Head ratio (rated dia / max dia) : 77.88 %
Power, rated : 28.70 hp
Cq/Ch/Ce/Cn [ANSI/HI 9.6.7-2010] : 1.00 / 1.00 / 1.00 / 1.00
Power, maximum, rated diameter : 33.55 hp
Selection status : Acceptable
Minimum recommended motor rating : 40.00 hp / 29.83 kW
Curve efficiencies are typical. For guaranteed values, contact factory
150
Minimum Continuous Stable Flow
Max allowable flow
135 11.00 in Preferred operating region
55 60 65 70 75
80 82
120 84
10.06 in 84
105
82
80
90
75
Head - ft
20.0 hp 70
75 9.00 in
65
60 60
30.0 hp
40.0 hp
55
45
30
25.0 hp
15
30
NPSH3 - ft
NPSH3
15
0
0 200 400 600 800 1,000 1,200 1,400 1,600 1,800 2,000 2,200 2,400
Flow - USgpm
JAMES, COOKE AND HOBSON INC. PHONE: · FAX:

· ,
Encompass 2.0 - 19.5.4
General Arrangement Drawing

Pump Data
Series 380 Discharge Size 6.00 in
Model 382B-SC Suction Size 6.00 in
Size 6x6x11 Impeller Diameter 10.06 in
Flow 945.0 USgpm Pressure Rating 19.18 psi
Head 96.00 ft Temperature Rating 68.00 deg F
RPM 1800 RPM Connection Suc/Dis Flanged 125#/125#
Rotation Right Base Type 6" Pipe Flange Support
Pump Paint Standard blue paint Coupling Type High Strength Aluminum
Motor Data
Power 40.00 hp - -
Phase 3 Efficiency (%) Not available
Frequency 60 Hz Efficiency Rating premium
Volts 230/460 Enclosure ODP
RPM 1800 Manufacturer Weg
Frame 324TC
Pump Materials of Construction

Pump Material Stainless fitted Motor Bracket Cast iron ASTM A48
Casing Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Seal Type Type 21
Impeller Stainless Steel Type 316 Seal Material Carbon Ceramic
Shaft Stainless Steel 416 Impeller Wear Ring -
Shaft Sleeve -
Estimated Weights
Pump 438.0 lb
Driver 465.0 lb
Total 903.0 lb
Additional Options
-
-
Drain Tap -
X DC DE DH YY VD AG BW
Size
16.00 8.60 10.98 26.95 17.00 9.75 23.00 7.00 0.50
Quote Information
Customer James, Cooke & Hobson
NOTES:
Customer Quote # 1095898
All dimensions are in inches.
Job Name FLUTEC PUMPS 2015
Dimensions may vary ± 1/4" (6mm) due to normal manufacturing tolerances.
Market Commercial
Conduit box is shown in approximate postion. Dimensions are not specified as they vary with each motor manufacturer.
Quote Item # 001
Dimension BW is clearance requred for servicing.
Quote Date 15 Jan 2020
Quote #: 189238-01.04 Date: January 15, 2020
To: Fernando J. Jasso Phone: (915) 581-5458
James, Cooke and Hobson Fax: (915) 581-9242
3800 Doniphan Dr. Email: fjj@jchinc.com
El Paso, TX 79922 Project Name:
Quantity Description Unit Price Total Price
1 189238-01.04 $34,550.00 $34,550.00

MUELLER ACCU-THERM Plate Heat Exchanger Model AT80MH /HV,
ICLRB-150 C/S Frame, with (466) 0.50 MM Type 304 Stainless Steel
Plates, Lock-In NBR Gaskets.( 127.0" Long X 28.8" Wide X 87.8" High)
6.00" C/S Studded connections and SA-193 GR B7 (CS) bolts.
Approximate shipping weight: 7894 LB.

Performance Specifications per Data Sheet No. 189238-01.04.*
Freight Estimate Not Included
Duty:
Media Name Flow Rate Temperature In Temperature Out Pressure Drop
Water 1100.0 GPM 98.3 °F 87.0 °F 10.2 PSI
Water 1100.0 GPM 85.0 °F 96.2 °F 10.2 PSI
Shipping Schedule: Shipment of equipment is projected to occur 7 week(s) after customer's final approval of shop drawings and
receipt of same by Mueller. This schedule is subject to prior sales and contingent of acceptance of all Purchase
Order or Contractual terms, whichever is applicable.
Payment Terms: Net 30 days with approved credit.
Delivery Terms: FCA Plant. Title passes to purchaser at point of origin.
Price Validity: This quote is valid for 30 days; Price is subject to escalation if order is not released for fabrication within 3
weeks of PMC submitting approval to buyer. Due to current material base price and surcharge volatility, the
material price included in our proposal is contingent upon domestic mill pricing, surcharge, and availability.
Seller reserves the right to increase pricing due to escalation in material cost. Material pricing is separate from
and not subject to the quote validity period. Additional details can be provided at your request.
This quotation is subject to the provisions of the attached Paul Mueller Make P.O. out to Paul Mueller Company
Company Standard Product Warranty and Terms and Conditions of
Sale which shall prevail over any additional, different, or inconsistent FastTrack P.O.
provisions in any purchase order or other document provided by
Purchaser, unless agreed to in writing signed by Seller. I hereby order the goods described in this offer.
CC: Fernie Jasso Signed By:

James, Cooke & Hobson, Inc.
4709 Ripley Drive Title:
El Paso, TX 79922
PH: 915-581-5458 Date: P.O. #:
Fax: 915-581-9242
fjj@jchinc.com Respectfully submitted,
James Liss/VS
Regional Sales Manager
(1.527)
MUELLER ACCU-THERM
PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER SPECIFICATION SHEET
PMC Spec. No. 189238-01.04 Sales Manager James Liss/VS
Ref No. Date Wednesday, January 15, 2020
Design Data Hot Side Cold Side

Heat Transfer Media Water Water
Volume Flow Rate 1100.0 1100.0 GPM
Mass Flow Rate 547685.6 547887.4 LB/HR
Inlet Temperature 98.3 85.0 °F
Outlet Temperature 87.0 96.2 °F
Density 8.30 8.30 LB/GAL
Specific Heat 0.998 0.998 BTU/LB F
Viscosity 0.74 0.76 CPS
Thermal Conductivity 0.358 0.357 BTU/FT H F
Pressure Drop 10.2 10.2 PSI
Operating Pressure 50.0 50.0 PSI G
Heat Transfer Rate 6148738 BTU/H
Log Mean Temperature Difference 2.0 °F
Operating U-Value 732 BTU/FT2 H F
Heat Transfer Area (All Frames) 4193.8 FT2
Mechanical Description
Frame Plate
Type ICLRB-150 Carbon Steel Type AT80M H /HV
Design Code ASME Section VIII, Div. 1 U Plate Material 0.50 MM 304 S/S SA-240
Design Pressure 75 PSI G Plates/Frame 466
Design Temp. Max/Min 150 °F / 0°F Passes-H/C 2/2
Test Pressure 98 PSI G Channels-H/C 232/233
Frames In Parallel/Series/Total 1/ 1/ 1 Gasket Material NBR
A-Dim. Min./Max. 66.03/ 70.55 Inch
Overall Length 127.00 Inch Connections Location
Overall Width 28.75 Inch Hot In 6.00 Inch C/S Studded 4F
Overall Height 87.81 Inch Hot Out 6.00 Inch C/S Studded 4R
Guide Bar Length/Capacity 120.00 Inch / 489 plates Cold In 6.00 Inch C/S Studded 3R
Compression Bolt Length/Capacity 102.00 Inch / 477 plates Cold Out 6.00 Inch C/S Studded 3F
Weight Operating/Empty 10724/ 7894 LB Vent 6.00 Inch C/S Studded 1F
Vent 6.00 Inch C/S Studded 2F
Notes: V13.0.0.0
Aluminum shroud omitted
The purchaser of the equipment bears total responsibility for suitability of use of all materials in this application.
We may have assumed some design values. If they differ from your requirements, a new design may be necessary.
ACCU-THERM FRAME DRAWING
CUSTOMER: James, Cooke and Hobson DATE: 01/15/2020
LOCATION: El Paso, TX 79922 INQUIRY NUMBER: 189238-01.04
TYPE: ACCU-THERM 80M H /HV / ICLRB-150 SERIAL NO.:
PACK LENGTH MAX (A): 70.55 Inch OVERALL LENGTH (L): 127.00 Inch
FIXED THICKNESS (TF): 2.00 Inch MOVABLE THICKNESS (TM):2.00 Inch
1F 2F 2R 1R
VENT VENT
4F 3F 3R 4R
HOT IN COLD OUT COLD IN HOT OUT
ACCU-THERM FLOW DIAGRAM
HOT COLD
MEDIUM: Water Water DESIGN PRESS: 75 PSI G
FLOW: 1100.0 1100.0 GPM TEST PRESS: 98 PSI G
TEMPERATURE IN: 98.3 85.0 °F DESIGN TEMP: 150°F
TEMPERATURE OUT: 87.0 96.2 °F MDMT: 0°F
PRESSURE DROP: 10.2 10.20 PSI VOLUME: 340.30 Gallons
FLOW PATH: 2 X 116 1 X 116 + 1 X 117 PLATE MATERIAL: 0.50 MM 304 S/S SA-240
GUIDE LENGTH / CAPACITY: 120.0 Inch / 489 plates GASKET MATERIAL: NBR
BOLT LENGTH / CAPACITY: 102.0 Inch / 477 plates BOLT MATERIAL: SA-193 GR B7 (CS)
PACK LENGTH MAX (A): 70.55 Inch
PACK LENGTH MIN: 66.03 Inch
OVERALL LENGTH (L): 127.00 Inch
CONNECTIONS TYPE MATERIAL SIZE POSITION EMPTY WEIGHT: 7,894 LB
HOT IN STUDDED C/S 6.00 4F OPERATING WEIGHT: 10,724 LB
HOT OUT STUDDED C/S 6.00 4R SHROUD MATERIAL: N/A
COLD IN STUDDED C/S 6.00 3R FIXED MATERIAL: SA-516 GR 70 NORMALIZED
COLD OUT STUDDED C/S 6.00 3F MOVABLE MATERIAL: SA-516 GR 70 NORMALIZED
VENT STUDDED C/S 6.00 1F Blind Flange w/ STUD PACK
VENT STUDDED C/S 6.00 2F Blind Flange w/ STUD PACK
UNIT IS DESIGNED AND FABRICATED PER ASME SECTION VIII, DIV. 1 WITH U MARKING
BILL OF MATERIAL
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
9818367 GASKET HX 80M NBR-FDA 1
9818486 FLO 80MH 0.50 304 NBRF R1234 386
9818487 FLO 80MV 0.50 304 NBRF R1234 78
9830777 80MH 0.50 316 R0000 1
9830778 80MV 0.50 316 R0000 1
9860286 END GSK 80M/P NBRF INSTALLED 1
9861074 FR FXD AT80L-150 BLK 2" 1
9861075 FR MVB AT80L-150 BLK 2" 1
9861353 GUIDE BEAM UPR REINF ASSY 120 1
9861625 FRAME COMPONENTS AT80LRB-150 1
9401467 FLG FCG 6" MVB W/PG AT80L 2
9401745 TIE BOLT COMP KWKN 1.5 CS 10
9403137 COVER STUDDED 6-316-CL150 2
9403161 GASKET FLANGE 6" .125" THK 2
9806439 ROD ALL THREAD 1.5-8UN CS ZP 1020
9807202 GUIDE BAR ASSY 2"OD 120"LG 1
9814256 NAMEPLATE ASME PHE 1
9817807 GASKET PORT NBR-FDA AT80 DIV 2
ACCU-THERM PLATE USAGE SUMMARY
NUMBER PLATE GASKET STYLE / PLATE PART

HX-PLATES MATERIAL MATERIAL OPENINGS NUMBER NUMBER
1 304 S/S SA-240 FULL NBR 80M H-LF / 1 2 3 4 1 1080080501106212341
154 304 S/S SA-240 NBR 80M H-R / 1 2 3 4 2080080501106112341
231 304 S/S SA-240 NBR 80M H-L / 1 2 3 4 2080080501106212341
1 304 S/S SA-240 NBR 80M H-L / 1 2 2080080501106212661
78 304 S/S SA-240 NBR 80M V-R / 1 2 3 4 2080090501106112341
1 304 S/S SA-240 NBR 80M V-R / 3 4 466 3080090501106100341
NOTE: ALL PLATES NUMBERED FROM 1 TO 309 ARE "H" TYPE PLATES.
ALL PLATES NUMBERED FROM 310 TO 466 ARE "HV" TYPE PLATES.
(2) DRAINS NEEDED ON THIS UNIT.
PICTORIAL VIEW AND TERMINOLOGY FOR PLATES AND GASKETS

NORMAL GASKETS FULL GASKETS
80M H-L 80M H-R 80M H-LF 80M H-RF
L = LEFT HAND R = RIGHT HAND

PLATES AS VIEWED FROM FIXED END
GASKETED SIDE OF PLATE FACES FIXED END
ADDITIONAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE
1. GOODS AND SERVICES. The goods shall be sold and/or services performed by Seller (collectively allowances for the repair or replacement of the defective Work, or refund the purchase price applicable to the defective
referred to herein as the “Work”) in accordance with the terms and conditions on the face hereof and the following portion of the Work, as provided below, but only after receiving written notification of any defects during the
terms and conditions (collectively “Seller’s Terms and Conditions”), which shall constitute the entire Agreement of applicable warranty period, and substantiation that the Work has been: stored, installed, maintained and operated
the parties with respect to the Work. Standard goods are updated by Seller from time to time, and it is Purchaser’s in accordance with Seller’s recommendations and standard industry practice; not subjected to accident, alteration,
responsibility to confirm that the updated goods are satisfactory for Purchaser’s intended use. abuse, misuse, temperatures, pressures, thermal performance, flow rates, media, start up, or vacuum conditions
different from, or beyond the original specifications; and not subjected to improper service, disassembly, or assembly
2. ACCEPTANCE. This offer is conditioned upon Purchaser’s acceptance of Seller’s Terms and Conditions. by the Purchaser. Seller is not liable for normal wear and tear, fouling or plugging, or items that are normally consumed
Seller hereby expressly rejects any and all terms in any purchase order or other order document of Purchaser which in operation such as gaskets and o-rings. THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE, AND IN LIEU OF ANY IMPLIED
are in addition to, different from, or inconsistent with, (collectively the “Rejected Terms”), Seller’s Terms and WARRANTY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
Conditions. Any purchase order or other order document issued by Purchaser shall, whether or not it contains terms FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR OTHER WARRANTY, WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
and conditions that are in addition to, different from, or inconsistent with Seller’s Terms and Conditions, and whether EXCEPT THE WARRANTY OF TITLE AND AGAINST PATENT INFRINGEMENT FOR WORK OF SELLER’S
or not signed by Seller, be deemed to be Purchaser’s acceptance of all of Seller’s Terms and Conditions contained in DESIGN.
this offer without amendment, and such Rejected Terms shall not be included in the Agreement of the parties, unless
agreed to in a written instrument signed by Seller that specifically references that Seller’s Terms and Conditions are THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT EXTEND TO PRODUCTS NOT OF SELLER’S MANUFACTURE: AS TO SUCH
being amended. Any provision in any purchase order or other order document of Purchaser that purports to reject PRODUCTS, SELLER CONVEYS TO PURCHASER THE WARRANTY, IF ANY, OF SELLER’S
Seller’s Terms and Conditions shall not be binding on Seller. This offer may be withdrawn at any time prior to SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS, TO THE EXTENT TRANSFERABLE WITHOUT ADDITIONAL COST
receiving Purchaser’s acceptance meeting all of the requirements for acceptance provided in this Section 2 and TO SELLER. THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT EXTEND TO MATERIALS PROVIDED BY PURCHASER.
Section 3 below, and this offer shall expire automatically if not accepted within thirty (30) days from the date on the
Purchaser shall not return Work claimed to be defective except at the direction of Seller. If Purchaser is directed to
face hereof.
return the Work all charges for transporting such Work to Seller shall be prepaid by Purchaser, and Seller shall return
3. CREDIT APPROVAL. Payment must be made in full prior to the Seller’s commencement of any Work such Work to Purchaser freight collect. Purchaser is responsible for all expenses of customs and duties. Permitted
unless alternative payment arrangements are included within this offer, and Purchaser’s acceptance of this offer as returns must be accompanied by a “Certificate of Use and Cleanliness” (available upon request) and a Material Safety
provided in Section 2 above is subject to approval of Purchaser’s credit worthiness by Seller’s Credit Department Data Sheet similar to OSHA Form 20 for each applicable material used in the Work. If Seller determines that the
within thirty (30) days of Purchaser’s acceptance. The evaluation of creditworthiness may include, but not be limited Work is defective, Seller may at its option elect to: (i) repair the Work at Seller’s facility, using independent contractors
to, a review of Seller’s records of Purchaser’s payment history. In the event that Seller’s Credit Department does not or Seller’s own personnel, (ii) repair or replace the Work at Purchaser’s facility, using independent contractors or
approve Purchaser’s credit worthiness within the thirty (30) day period Purchaser’s acceptance shall be conclusively Seller’s own personnel, (iii) grant a reasonable allowance for repairs, but not exceeding the amount of the direct labor
deemed rejected by Seller and no agreement of the parties shall be deemed to exist for any purposes. For alternative costs at the rates Seller would have paid for its own employees, (iv) grant a reasonable allowance for the replacement
payment terms, Seller may require Purchaser to execute Seller’s form of security agreement and post other security. of the defective portion of the Work, but not exceeding the purchase price applicable to such portion, or (v) refund
the purchase price applicable to the defective portion of the Work. When warranty work is performed at Purchaser’s
4. PAYMENT. Purchaser shall make payments in accordance with this Agreement, or as otherwise approved facility, Purchaser, without charge, shall fully cooperate with, and make the Work and its facilities available when
by Seller’s Credit Department. If Seller delays performance or release of the Work as requested by Purchaser for a the warranty work is scheduled, and shall provide all necessary utilities.
period in excess of ten (10) days, or under paragraph 6 hereof (“Purchaser’s Delay Request”), Purchaser shall pay the
full purchase price (or the final installment) within thirty (30) days after Purchaser’s Delay Request and shall pay a ORAL STATEMENTS BY SELLER’S EMPLOYEES OR REPRESENTATIVES DO NOT CONSTITUTE
reasonable storage charge, and for on site work, a reasonable charge for the protection of the Work, and reasonable WARRANTIES, shall not be relied upon by Purchaser, and are not part of the Agreement between the parties. NO
charges for Seller’s de-mobilization and remobilization as determined by Seller. Any balance not paid when due shall OTHER WARRANTIES are given beyond those set forth in this Agreement.
draw interest at the rate of 1.5% per month (18% A.P.R.) on the average daily balance until paid or the highest rate
allowed by applicable law, whichever is less. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in paragraph 15 hereof, the
11. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Purchaser’s exclusive remedy for claims arising out of or related to the
Work shall be for damages. Seller shall not under any circumstances be liable for special, indirect, incidental, punitive,
parties agree that either party may bring a suit against the other when the amount in controversy in the initial claim
exemplary, multiple, or consequential damages, such as, but not limited to, loss of profits or revenue, costs of capital,
or in any counterclaim in the suit is $75,000.00 or less, exclusive of interest and costs, and the prevailing party in such
plant shutdowns, claims by Purchaser’s customer, or damage or loss to other property or equipment. The remedies
suit shall be entitled to recover from the other party damages not exceeding $75,000.00 plus interest, and each party
of the Purchaser, and any other party, arising out of or related to the Work, set forth herein are exclusive, and the
shall bear its own attorney’s fees, litigation expenses, and costs incurred in the litigation. All payments shall be made
liability of Seller with respect to the Work, or anything done in connection therewith, or from the manufacture, sale,
in currency of the United States.
delivery, resale, installation, construction, performance, or use of any of the Seller’s Work, whether based on theories
5. SPECIFICATIONS. If Seller submits any drawings or other specifications to Purchaser for approval, and of contract, negligence, strict liability, tort, laws or regulations, warranty, or otherwise, shall not exceed the price of
Purchaser does not approve or disapprove of them within the time specified by Seller, Seller shall have the right to the specific portion of the Work upon which the liability is based.
perform the Work at a later date and charge a higher purchase price, as reasonably necessitated by Purchaser’s delay.
Seller is not responsible for corrosion or suitability of use for any material in any particular application. The corrosion
6. SHIPMENT AND COMPLETION. So long as Purchaser is not in default, Seller shall ship the Work resistance and suitability of use for a material is dependent on operating environment, conditions, cleaning practices,
upon completion, except that, subject to paragraph 4 hereof, Seller shall delay shipment as requested by Purchaser and many other factors beyond the control of Seller. The Purchaser/User of Seller’s Work bears total responsibility
in writing. Since the Work is to be manufactured to special order, the completion date designated on the face hereof for corrosion or suitability for use of all materials in their particular application.
is estimated and not guaranteed; Seller may ship or complete the Work within a reasonable period either before or
after the designated completion date. Unless otherwise provided on the face hereof, Seller may ship the Work by any
12. CANCELLATION. Purchaser shall not have any right to cancel this Agreement without Seller’s prior
written consent, and without paying Seller a cancellation charge equal to total price of the Work less the estimated
mode, and in full or partial shipments. Seller shall not be liable for any failure or delay to complete the Work due to
direct labor and materials not expended less the salvage value of materials already purchased.
Purchaser’s delay in making payments, causes beyond Seller’s control, including without limitation, acts of God, wars,
adverse weather conditions, terrorism, sabotage, casualties, accidents, labor disputes or shortages, governmental 13. REMEDIES. If Purchaser fails to make required payments in a timely manner, or breaches any of the other
laws, ordinances, rules or regulations (such as priorities, requisitions, allocations and price adjustment restrictions), terms or conditions hereof or any other agreement with Seller, Seller may at its option suspend its performance of
or an inability to obtain material, equipment or transportation (collectively “Permitted Delays”). Seller agrees that it the Work and charge Purchaser reasonable charges for storage or protection of the Work, reasonable charges for the
will resume performance of the Work within a reasonable period after the cessation of the Permitted Delay. costs incurred in stopping and restarting the Work including de-mobilization and re-mobilization, or Seller may
terminate this Agreement and withhold further shipments or performance on this or any other order. The Seller’s
7. TITLE, RISK OF LOSS. Unless otherwise provided on the face hereof, Work requiring shipment shall be
remedies provided herein shall be cumulative and in addition to any other remedies allowed by law or in equity. The
shipped EXW Seller’s plant: (a) and all risks of loss with respect to the Work shall transfer to the Purchaser after it
failure of Seller to exercise any remedy shall not constitute a waiver of the right to exercise that, or any other remedy;
has been placed in the possession of a carrier, which carrier may include Mueller Transportation, Inc.; and (b) legal
and no waiver of any breach of any provision herein shall operate as a waiver of any other breach of the same or any
title shall pass to Purchaser on Seller’s receipt of payment in full. For Work performed on Purchaser’s site or the end
other provision.
user’s site: (c) Purchaser shall maintain or cause the end user to maintain Builder’s Risk Insurance in the full value
of the project of which the Work is a part, with Seller and its subcontractors named as additional insureds, and 14. APPLICABLE LAW. Except as otherwise provided herein: this Agreement shall be governed by the internal
providing “All Risks” coverage for damage to the Work; (d) in the absence of Builder’s Risk Insurance, or in the absence laws of the State of Missouri, without reference to its choice of law provisions; Seller and Purchaser hereby consent
of coverage for the damage to the Work under said policy, Purchaser shall bear all risk of loss to the Work except for to personal jurisdiction of the state and federal courts located in Springfield, Missouri; hereby consent to the exclusive
physical damage to the Work caused by the active negligence or willful misconduct of Seller or its subcontractors; venue of any suit in such courts; hereby WAIVE THE RIGHT TO TRIAL BY JURY in any suit; and in each case where
and (e) title shall to the Work shall pass upon substantial completion of the Work subject to final payment by the claims in the suit relate in whole or in part to this Agreement or the Work, and whether based on theories of
Purchaser. contract, negligence, strict liability, tort, laws or regulations, warranty, or otherwise.
8. INSPECTION AND CLEANING. Unless otherwise provided on the face hereof, Seller’s obligation is 15. ARBITRATION. Any dispute, controversy or claim arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the Work,
to provide completed Work in broom-clean condition. For Work that is shipped, immediately upon receipt it is the whether based on theories of contract, negligence, strict liability, tort, laws or regulations, warranty, or otherwise,
Purchaser’s responsibility to carefully inspect and properly remove road film, abrasives, chemicals, dust, or other (including, but not limited to, any dispute relating to the existence, interpretation, breach, or termination of this
residues from all surfaces that may have been deposited during the manufacture or shipment of the Work. Use or Agreement, or the agreement of the parties to arbitrate disputes), where the amount in controversy in the initial claim
storage of the Work without properly removing residues may result in rust or corrosion. Failure to promptly and or in any counterclaim exceeds $75,000.00, exclusive of interest and costs, that cannot be resolved by the parties
properly remove adhesive film from any protective sheeting and other wrappers may cause difficulty in removing involved, within ninety (90) days of notification by either party of the dispute, shall be resolved by binding arbitration
these materials and leave residues. The Purchaser assumes total responsibility for any damage to the Work resulting administered by and in accordance with the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association
from the failure to promptly and properly remove residues, wrappers and adhesive film. or such other arbitral body mutually agreed to by the parties. The award of the arbitrator(s) may be entered by any
court having jurisdiction thereof. The costs of the arbitration shall be shared equally by the parties, and each party
Purchaser shall inspect the Work at the time and place of delivery for Work that is shipped, and upon substantial
shall bear its own attorney fees and expenses, provided that where a party asserting a claim in excess of $75,000.00
completion for Work performed on site, and Purchaser agrees that such occasion shall constitute a reasonable
is awarded less than the sum or value of $75,000.00 computed without regard to any setoff, claim, or counterclaim of
opportunity for its full inspection. The parties agree that Purchaser’s failure to reject the Work within three (3)
the other party, the party so failing to recover, shall bear all the fees of the arbitrator(s) and the arbitration service
business days shall constitute acceptance of the Work. After Purchaser inspects and accepts the Work, Purchaser
conducting the arbitration. Any arbitration hearing shall be conducted exclusively in Springfield, Missouri. Purchaser
shall, except as provided in paragraph 10 hereof, be deemed to have acknowledged that the Work complies with all
and Seller agree that the agreement to arbitrate disputes shall not preclude Seller from exercising lien rights available
specifications, representations and warranties of Seller, and to have waived any claim or cause of action against Seller
under the laws of any state where the Work is located or performed, including filing any suit to enforce its lien rights,
with respect to the Work. Purchaser is encouraged to inspect the Work during Seller’s performance at Seller's plant
provided that when the amount in controversy in the initial claim or in any counterclaim exceeds $75,000.00, exclusive
and on site for Work performed on site, and to witness testing of the Work. For Work that is performed in whole or in
of interest and costs, the suit shall be stayed, and the Seller’s claims for payment and the Purchaser’s defenses to
part at Seller’s plant, and if return of the Work is impractical, Purchaser may be required to inspect the Work at Seller’s
payments and counterclaims shall be determined by arbitration.
plant prior to shipment, which shall be deemed to be a reasonable opportunity to inspect and, upon satisfactory
completion, shall constitute Purchaser’s acceptance of the Work. If Purchaser rightfully rejects the Work, Seller shall 16. MISCELLANEOUS. This Agreement is intended by the parties as a complete and exclusive statement of
have the same rights to cure as provided in Section 10 for correction of warranty matters. the terms of their agreement. No course of prior dealings between the parties and no usage of trade shall be relevant
to supplement or explain any term used herein, and no modification shall be binding on Seller unless made in a writing
9. TAXES AND DUTIES. In addition to the purchase price, Purchaser shall pay all sales, use and excise taxes,
signed by Seller. No claim or right arising out of a breach of this Agreement can be discharged in whole or in part by
tariffs, duties and other charges imposed by any country, state, locality or other political subdivision in connection
a waiver or renunciation of the claim or right unless the waiver or renunciation is supported by separate consideration
with the sale or performance of the Work. For tax purposes, title to the Work shall pass from Seller to Purchaser upon
and is in a writing signed by Seller. Purchaser shall not assign its rights or delegate its duties under this Agreement.
being loaded for shipment, whether by common carrier, or Purchaser’s own trucks, or otherwise, or upon substantial
Facsimile and email signatures of the parties transmitted electronically, and which clearly indicate a party’s intent
completion for Work performed on site.
to sign an agreement, shall constitute original signatures for all purposes. The invalidity of any portion of this
10. WARRANTIES. Except as specific terms of this warranty are modified on the face hereof, or in a written Agreement shall not affect the validity of any remaining portions thereof. Nothing contained herein shall be construed
agreement between Seller and Purchaser, Seller warrants to the original Purchaser, that Seller’s Work shall be new, as creating any relationship between the parties other than as independent contractors.
and shall be free of defects in material and workmanship. If the Work does not conform to this warranty within one
(1) year from the date of original shipment, (or one (1) year from: the date of completion if shipment is delayed by
THIS AGREEMENT CONTAINS A BINDING ARBITRATION PROVISION WHICH MAY
Purchaser; the date of substantial completion for Work performed on site; or from the earlier date of Purchaser’s or
BE ENFORCED BY THE PARTIES.
others use of the Work, as applicable in each case), Seller, at its election and expense, shall repair, replace, grant (4/11/16) 0-136TC
Warranty
ACCU-THERM® PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER
GENERAL PROVISIONS
Paul Mueller Company (hereinafter referred to as Company) warrants to the original purchaser/user (hereinafter referred to as the Customer) that
all equipment or parts thereof manufactured by it will be free from defects in material and workmanship only, under normal use and service, for a
period of one year from the date of original shipment.
The Company shall not be liable for any loss of profit, loss by reason of plant shutdown, non-operation or increased cost of operation, loss of product
or materials, or other special or consequential loss or damages. This warranty will not apply to any equipment (or parts thereof ) which has been
subjected to accident, alteration, abuse, or misuse. Misuse may constitute but not be limited to: subjecting the heat exchanger to temperature,
pressure, or vacuum beyond the design limitations; compression of the plate pack beyond the minimum dimension; or improper disassembly
or assembly by the Customer, or uses other than those intended by the Company. The Company will warrant thermal performance of the unit in
conformance with original specifications only, since process changes such as flow rates, temperatures, or media will affect thermal performance.
The Company cannot warrant against any fouling or plugging for any design. The Company will aid in the selection of gasket, plate, and adhesive
material but will assume no liability for material compatibility with Customer’s products or media. The Company is not responsible for corrosion
or suitability for use of any material in any particular application. The corrosion resistance and suitability for use of a material is dependent on
operating environment, and conditions, cleaning, practices, and many other factors beyond the control of the Company. The user of this equipment
bears total responsibility for corrosion or suitability for use of all materials in their particular application. This warranty is in lieu of all other
warranties, expressed or implied, (including the implied warranty of merchantability and fitness) and of all other obligations or liabilities on the
part of the Company, and the Company will neither assume nor authorize any other person to assume for it any other obligation or liability in
connection with this equipment.
COMPONENTS NOT MANUFACTURED BY THE COMPANY

Components not manufactured by the Company, but furnished as part of its equipment (for example: motors, starters, thermometers, controls, etc.),
will be warranted by the Company only to the extent of the component manufacturer’s warranty.
RETURN OF PARTS OR EQUIPMENT TO COMPANY PLANT

Permission to return any parts or equipment must be obtained, in writing, and must be returned with transportation costs prepaid. Any used
heat-exchanger, plate, or gasket that is being returned must be accompanied by a “Certificate of Use and Cleanliness” (available upon request)
and a Manufacturer’s Safety Data Sheet similar to OSHA Form 20. In the event that equipment (or parts thereof ) manufactured by the Company
is returned to the Company plant, the Company obligation will be limited to repairing or replacing parts which, upon examination, are found (to
the satisfaction of the Company) to be defective in either material or workmanship. No transportation charges will be paid by the Company unless
written approval for transportation charges is given by the Company.
VISIT TO COMPANY PLANT BEFORE SHIPMENT

When the Customer plans to install Mueller equipment in a manner (or at such distance from the Company plant) that will make it impractical to
return it for in-warranty repairs, the Customer is encouraged to visit the Company plant before shipment to inspect and, when possible, witness
testing of the equipment.
REPAIR OF EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN THE CONTINENTAL UNITED STATES

Should an in-warranty failure occur, and it is, in the judgement of the Company, impractical to return the equipment for repairs, the Company will
arrange for the repairs to be made by its personnel or, at its option, sublet to a qualified company. The Customer will be expected to cooperate by
making the equipment available and accessible when the work is scheduled and is expected to provide the necessary utilities.
If local labor conditions prohibit such work being done by Company personnel under the conditions and at the rates payable by its contracts with its
employees, the Company obligation shall be limited to supervision of the work, replacement of defective parts, and labor costs in an amount equal to
the amount which would be payable for a reasonable number of hours required to make the repairs at the rates payable under the terms of Company
contracts with its employees. In such an event, all labor costs shall be paid by the Customer and the Company will reimburse the Customer to the
extent set forth above.
REPAIR OF EQUIPMENT INSTALLED OUTSIDE THE CONTINENTAL UNITED STATES

Should an in-warranty failure occur, and it is, in the judgement of the Company, impractical to return the equipment for repairs, the Company
obligation shall be limited, and the Company shall have the options of either sending a service representative to repair (or supervise the repairs) or
granting a reasonable allowance for having the repairs made locally.
PAUL MUELLER COMPAN Y | 1600 WEST PHELPS STREE T | SPRINGFIELD, MO 65802 | 417-575-9000 | W W W.PAULMUELLER.COM
(9/1/16) AT-1615-6
TAB 5
COOLING TOWER SELECTION & RELATED COMPONENTS

BY OTHERS
TAB 6
INTERNAL COMPONENTS
a) Fan Coils & Electric Heat

b) Expansion Tanks
c) Pot Feeders
d) Air Separators
e) Exhaust Fan
f) Manual Valves
g) Triple Duty Valves
h) Suction Guides
i) Wye Strainers
j) Lighting
k) Backflow Preventer
l) Pressure Relief Valve
m) Pressure Reducing Valve
Printed Date: 02/21/2020
Job: SQ-140-A V01
Mark: EXHAUST FAN ESI WEST ROCK
Model: SQ-140-A
Model: SQ-140-A
Direct Drive Centrifugal Inline Fan
Dimensional
Quantity 1
Weight w/o Acc's (lb) 101
Weight w/ Acc's (lb) 122
Max T Motor Frame Size 145
Optional Damper (in.) 20 x 20
Performance
Requested Volume (CFM) 2,600
Actual Volume (CFM) 2,845
Total External SP (in. wg) 0.719
Fan RPM 1725
Operating Power (hp) 1.02
Elevation (ft) 20
Airstream Temp.(F) 70
Air Density (lb/ft3) 0.075
Tip Speed (ft/min) 6,576
Static Eff. (%) 31
Motor
Motor Mounted Yes
Size (hp) 1 1/2
Voltage/Cycle/Phase 208/60/3 Static Pressure Calculations
Enclosure ODP External SP 0.6 in. wg
Motor RPM 1725 Direct Drive RPM Adjustment 0.119 in. wg
Total External SP 0.719 in. wg
Windings 1
NEC FLA* (Amps) 6.6
Notes:
All dimensions shown are in units of in.
*NEC FLA - based on tables 430.248 or 430.250 of
National Electrical Code 2014. Actual motor FLA may vary,
Sound Power by Octave Band for sizing thermal overload, consult factory.
Sound LwA - A weighted sound power level, based on ANSI S1.4
62.5 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 LwA dBA Sones dBA - A weighted sound pressure level, based on 11.5 dB
Data attenuation per Octave band at 5 ft - dBA levels are not
Inlet 77 77 85 82 73 71 68 65 82 71 18.5 licensed by AMCA International
Radiated 80 78 82 76 65 56 51 50 77 65 12.8 Sones - calculated using AMCA 301 at 5 ft
Generated by: jcarreon@chil-pak.com

CAPS
\\AM-SERVER\proyectosam\BIDDING\5163
4.28.1746 ESI West Rock\HYDRONICS\SUBMITTALS\INTERNAL COMPONENTS\EXHAUST FAN\SQ-140-APage
V01.gfcj
1 of 3
Job: SQ-140-A V01
Model: SQ-140-A
Model: SQ-140-A
Standard Construction Features:
- Galvanized steel housing - Backward inclined composite (sizes 60-95) or
aluminum (sizes 100-160) wheel - Two bolted access panels - Integral duct
connection flanges - Ball bearing motors (sizes 100-160 and all vari-green
motors), sleeve bearing motors (sizes 60-95) - Corrosion resistant fasteners
Selected Options & Accessories:
Switch, NEMA-1, Toggle, Shipped with Unit
Junction Box Mounted & Wired
Damper Shipped Loose, Inline, WD-330-PB-20X20, Gravity Operated, Not
Coated
Isolators & Brackets, Spring Hanging (1 Kit(s): Qty 4, PN: 850344) (Shipped
Loose)
Unit Warranty: 1 Yr (Standard)

CAPS
V01.gfcj
2 of 3
Job: SQ-140-A V01
Model: SQ-140-A
SQ-140-A Direct Drive Centrifugal Inline Fan
26.75
AIRFLOW
19.63
AIRFLOW
TOP VIEW
19.88 SQ. INLET 23.00
23.00 1.50 22.00 1.50

25.00
END VIEW SIDE VIEW
Notes: All dimensions shown are in units of in.

CAPS
V01.gfcj
3 of 3
Bypass / Filter Feeders
Operations & Maintenance Manual
Record Your Model, Serial Number and

Other Information on the back of this document.
Manufacturing: Bypass & Filter Feeders, Glycol Feed Packages, Separators & Separator Systems,
Tanks, Tank Stands, Chemical Batch Mixers, Corrosion Coupon Racks, Packaged Feed Systems and
Custom Systems
P.O. Box 8697, Brea, CA 92822-5697  Phone: 714) 257-9165

113 Viking Ave., Brea, CA 92821  Fax: 714) 257-9215
www.gtpcompany.com  customerservice@gtpcompany.com
General Treatment Products Inc., Brea, CA 92821

O&M Manual INSTFDR Rev. 0115, Page 1 of 5
Contents Page
1.0 Introduction 2
2.0 Warranty 2
3.0 Unpacking 2
3.1 Order Verification 3
4.0 Location and Environment 3
5.0 Installation 3
5.1 Connecting to system 3
5.2 Lid Installation 4
5.3 Filter installation and replacement 4
6.0 Pressure and Temperature Limitations 5
7.0 Routine Maintenance 5
8.0 Parts Listing 5
9.0 Trouble Shooting 6
10.0 Product Label, Model Number, Serial Number and Pressure Settings 6
*** WARNING – BEFORE YOU GET STARTED ***
1) All fasteners & fittings should be inspected and secured before operation as they may be loosened in transit
2) Personnel safety practices should apply at all times
3) Safety glasses or face shields and gloves should be worn
4) Do not service without disconnecting power
5) Close isolation valve and release pressure before servicing any components on the system
6) All liquids in system should be drained before servicing
1.0 INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing General Treatment Products Industrial Bypass / Filter Feeders.
In this document, we explain the basics for locating, installing and operating your bypass / filter feeder. For
further information, please contact us at customerservice@gtpcompany.com or call us at the phone number
on the cover.
2.0 WARRANTY General Treatment Products Bypass / Filter Feeders are guaranteed for two years from
the shipment against manufacturing defects in material and workmanship that develop in the service for which
they are designed. We will repair or replace a defective part of this system when returned to our factory with
freight prepaid; providing that the part is found to be defective upon inspection. We assume no liability for
labor and/or other expenses in making repairs or adjustments.
3.0 UNPACKING Upon receipt of order, inspect package thoroughly. In the event there was damage
incurred in transit you must notify the freight company within 3-5 days of receipt of order. Once feeder is
inspected for damage and received in good condition, store indoors until installing.

3.1 ORDER VERIFICATION In order to verify receipt of correct product, use the following table and model
number to identify the contents.
Model Numbering
FB 2 /PF20-VPFB
Options
QC Quarter Turn Quick-Closure & Cor-Plate (200P/200F)
HP High Pressure feeder with fill valve and funnel
PF20 20 Micron pleated filter, 180F and handle
SF25 25 Micron sock filter, 180F and handle
EPC OD Green, epoxy coating, inside and out
VPFB Valve package, flat bottom feeder
VPDB Valve package, dome bottom feeder
EFFB Easy-Fit hose kit, flat bottom feeder
EFDB Easy-Fit hose kit, dome bottom feeder
FL06 Fill funnel, 6” diameter (10” diameter optional)
S125 Sight level gauge, 125PSI (300PSI optional)
PG300 Pressure gauge, 0-300PSI
AR 1/4" NPT Air release (-QC Models Only)
Gallons
1 1 gallon model (1.25GL max. capacity)
Base Model
FB Flat bottom feeder
4.0 LOCATION AND ENVIROMENT Although there is no power requirements, bypass/filter & bromine
feeders should not be exposed to direct elements. In the case there is no dry location that is convenient to
install the bypass/filter feeder. A shelter, awning or shed should to be installed to extend product life.
5.0 INSTALLATION Once location is decided on, feeder needs to be securely mounted. Be sure that flat
bottom feeders are strapped to secure surface and dome bottom feeders (with legs included) are secured with
local building codes. In accordance, outlet piping should be supported within 12 inches of feeder. System
vibrations should be minimal.
5.1 CONNECTING TO THE SYSTEM Feeder bypass flow rate (In GPM) shall not exceed volume of
feeder (In Gallons). Flow rates in excess of feeder volume, (one gallon feeder flow rate should be 1GPM)
dramatically reduces feeder and filter life. Flow control valves should be installed on discharge side of feeder.
All GTP feeder pressure and temperature limitations are designated on product label. Be sure the feeder meets
or exceeds your systems requirements. GTP suggests the installation of air release valve, if not already
supplied.
(Standard feeders and Pleated Filter Feeders) “FB” Flat bottom feeders come standard with 2 fittings.
Lower side fitting is the inlet and the upper neck fitting is the discharge. “DB” Dome bottom feeders come
standard with 3 fittings. Lower side fitting is the inlet, upper neck fittings are the discharge and the bottom
dome fitting is for the drain.
(Sock Filter Feeders) “FB” Flat bottom feeders come standard with 2 fittings. Lower side fitting is the outlet
and the upper neck fitting is the inlet. “DB” Dome bottom feeders come standard with 3 fittings. Lower side
fitting is the outlet, upper neck fittings are the inlet and the bottom dome fitting is for the drain.
Assembly and installation drawings are available, visit us at www.gtpcompany.com or contact the factory
for assistance.
5.2a LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (Standard Victaulic or Bolted Closure)

1) Close feeder isolation valves
2) Open pressure relief valve in lid
3) Loosen bolts and remove bolts (15/16” wrench)
4) Loosen and remove half couplings
5) Loosen and remove gasket/end cap.
6) Remove Filter (if any) and fill feeder.
7) When reassembling, it is easiest to put gasket on end cap before placing on neck of feeder.

8) Add half couplings, align with groove on neck and pinch together by hand. Be sure not to pinch gasket
in coupling as tightened.
9) Add bolts and tighten till snug. Close pressure relief valve and slowly open isolation valves. Victaulic
Caps will rise and seat, once pressure is applied.
10) Return valves to normal operating position.
5.2b LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (“QC” Quick Closure)

2) Inspect O-ring for wear and proper alignment in pressure plate groove.
3) Tighten lid screw through lid and in to back of pressure plate.
4) Fit lid and three prong tabs to neck ring grooves.
5) Press lid down and turn until tight. Note: If lid does not fit, contact factory for assistance.
5.2c HP FILL/INSTALLATION (Fill Funnel and Valve)

2) Install ¾” discharge tee and ¾” short nipple in to feeder top connection.
3) Install ¾” fill isolation valve and ¾” long nipple to discharge tee.
4) Install fill funnel and ¾” short nipple to valve.
5.3 PLEATED FILTER INSTALLATION / INSPECTION

1) Isolate feeder and release internal pressure with drain valve or other. When it is safe, remove lid
assembly and remove pleated filter assembly. Disassemble pleated filter assembly and inspect for damage
and rinse filter.
2) Align filter and Viton gasket with handle assembly.
3) Place stainless steel hex bolt down handle assembly and through filter.
4) Install keep nut and filter holder through bottom or filter.
5) Screw long keep nut assembly to and of hex bolt. Keep handle, filter and nut assembly aligned as you
tighten.
6) Place filter assembly through neck opening in feeder and reinstall lid.
5.4 SOCK FILTER INSTALLATION / INSPECTION

1) Isolate feeder and release internal pressure with drain valve or other. When it is safe, remove lid
assembly and remove pleated filter assembly. Disassemble sock filter assembly and inspect for damage
and rinse filter.
2) Collapse sock filter and insert through handle assembly until Ring is just above retaining washer..
3) While still collapsed, insert sock filter into perforated basket assembly.
4) Reinsert sock filter assembly into feeder opening.
5) Reinstall feeder closure and resume flow. Flow will expand filter sock to perforated basket.
6.0 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS: Standard Bypass Feeders maximum operating
perimeters are 300PSI @ 200F. “QC” designated feeders have a maximum rating of 200PSI @ 200F. “HP”
designated feeders have a maximum rating of 300PSI @ 200F. “PF” designated feeders have a maximum
rating of 180F. Some optional fittings, as noted in descriptions, may change limitations, contact factory for
assistance.
MAXIMUM SHORT MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
MATERIAL TERM OPERATING OPERATING
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE PRESSURE
Polyethylene (PE) 160oF/69oC 85oF/36oC N/A
Polyvinylchloride (PVC) 140oF/60oC 85oF/36oC 100PSI/6.9BAR
Chlorinated Polyvinylchloride (CPVC) 180oF/77oC 120oF/49oC 100PSI/6.9BAR
Polypropylene (PP) 180oF/77oC 120oF/49oC 100PSI/6.9BAR
Teflon (PTFE) 200oF/93oC 200oF/93oC N/A
Carbon Steel (CS) 200oF/93oC 200oF/93oC 150PSI/10.3BAR
Cast Iron (CI) 200oF/93oC 200oF/93oC 150PSI/10.3BAR
Brass (BR) 200oF/93oC 200oF/93oC 150PSI/10.3BAR
Stainless Steel (SS) 200oF/93oC 200oF/93oC 150PSI/10.3BAR
Note: Minimum Fluid Temperature is 50oF/10oC.
7.0 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Routine maintenance in this section is referred to as checking a feeder once a
month until a maintenance schedule can be determined, filter models may need frequent cleaning on start-up
of new closed loop systems. All fasteners should be check for proper operations. Maintenance and care will
depend upon the usage and environment in which the feeder is subject to.

8.0 PARTS LISTING The following tables itemize parts that may be replaced in the field. If further
breakdown is needed, consult manufacturer’s operations manual or call us for assistance.
Part Description Feeder Model
FC3.0 Feeder closure assembly, coupling, plate & air release All STD Models
0160030 Feeder closure plate, 1/4"FNPT tap & air release All STD Models
0160031 Feeder closure gasket, EPDM All STD Models
QC3.5 Feeder Quick Closure Assembly with NEW Cor-Plate “-QC” Models
0160032 Feeder Quick Closure replacement O-ring “-QC” Models
HNG3.0 Pleated filter hanger assembly (standard closure) All Filter Models
0160040 Pleated filter upper gasket, EPDM All Filter Models
0160041 Pleated filter hanger tube and lower nut assembly All Filter Models
HNG3.5 Pleated filter hanger assembly (“QC” closure) All Filter Models
0160042 Pleated filter upper gasket, EPDM All Filter Models
RPF20 20Micron replacement pleated filter (6 pack available) All Filter Models
RSF25 25Micron replacement sock filter with ring (6 pack available) All Filter Models
0160001 Air release valve, 300PSI, 1/4" MNPT, brass All Models
0160002 Pressure gauge, 0-300PSI, back tap, brass All Models
0160003 Plated steel replacement carriage bolts hardware for closure All Models
VPFB Valve package, flat bottom feeders FB Models
VPDB Valve package, dome bottom feeders DB Models
EFFB Easy-Fit hose kit valve package, flat bottom feeders FB Models
EFDB Easy-Fit hose kit valve package, dome bottom feeders DB Models
FL06 Fill funnel, 6” diameter All Models
FL10 Fill funnel, 10” diameter (high capacity) All Models
Note: Contact customer service for replacement parts not listed above.
9.0 TROUBLE SHOOTING

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE / ACTION
Filters or strainers are dirty or fouled
Low flow rate Discharge piping is restricted or undersized
Inlet piping is restricted or undersized
Closure is not aligned properly
Lid is leaking Hardware is not tight
Gasket is fouled or needs to be replaced
Chemical attack, consult factory
Body is leaking
Damaged in shipment, consult factory
If you are still having trouble, contact us at repairs@gtpcompany.com, or you can call us at the
number on the front of the Instruction manual.
10.0 PRODUCT LABEL
Model:
Serial Number:

Job: SQ-140-A V01
Model: SQ-140-A
Model: SQ-140-A
Dimensional
Quantity 1
Weight w/o Acc's (lb) 101
Weight w/ Acc's (lb) 122
Max T Motor Frame Size 145
Optional Damper (in.) 20 x 20
Performance
Requested Volume (CFM) 2,600
Actual Volume (CFM) 2,845
Total External SP (in. wg) 0.719
Fan RPM 1725
Operating Power (hp) 1.02
Elevation (ft) 20
Airstream Temp.(F) 70
Air Density (lb/ft3) 0.075
Tip Speed (ft/min) 6,576
Static Eff. (%) 31
Motor
Motor Mounted Yes
Size (hp) 1 1/2
Voltage/Cycle/Phase 208/60/3 Static Pressure Calculations
Enclosure ODP External SP 0.6 in. wg
Motor RPM 1725 Direct Drive RPM Adjustment 0.119 in. wg
Total External SP 0.719 in. wg
Windings 1
NEC FLA* (Amps) 6.6
Notes:
All dimensions shown are in units of in.
*NEC FLA - based on tables 430.248 or 430.250 of
National Electrical Code 2014. Actual motor FLA may vary,
Sound Power by Octave Band for sizing thermal overload, consult factory.
Sound LwA - A weighted sound power level, based on ANSI S1.4
62.5 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 LwA dBA Sones dBA - A weighted sound pressure level, based on 11.5 dB
Data attenuation per Octave band at 5 ft - dBA levels are not
Inlet 77 77 85 82 73 71 68 65 82 71 18.5 licensed by AMCA International
Radiated 80 78 82 76 65 56 51 50 77 65 12.8 Sones - calculated using AMCA 301 at 5 ft

CAPS
V01.gfcj
1 of 3
Job: SQ-140-A V01
Model: SQ-140-A
Model: SQ-140-A
Standard Construction Features:
- Galvanized steel housing - Backward inclined composite (sizes 60-95) or
aluminum (sizes 100-160) wheel - Two bolted access panels - Integral duct
connection flanges - Ball bearing motors (sizes 100-160 and all vari-green
motors), sleeve bearing motors (sizes 60-95) - Corrosion resistant fasteners
Selected Options & Accessories:
Switch, NEMA-1, Toggle, Shipped with Unit
Junction Box Mounted & Wired
Damper Shipped Loose, Inline, WD-330-PB-20X20, Gravity Operated, Not
Coated
Isolators & Brackets, Spring Hanging (1 Kit(s): Qty 4, PN: 850344) (Shipped
Loose)
Unit Warranty: 1 Yr (Standard)

CAPS
V01.gfcj
2 of 3
Job: SQ-140-A V01
Model: SQ-140-A
SQ-140-A Direct Drive Centrifugal Inline Fan
26.75
AIRFLOW
19.63
AIRFLOW
TOP VIEW
19.88 SQ. INLET 23.00
23.00 1.50 22.00 1.50

25.00
END VIEW SIDE VIEW
Notes: All dimensions shown are in units of in.

CAPS
V01.gfcj
3 of 3
VALVES & ACCESSORIES
FIG. 7250 FLOW DATA:
Suction Diffuser NOTE 1. Most U.S. piping engineers specify system startup
instructions for new systems which include removing
the pre-filter screen after system flushing of the main
The Fig. 7250 Gruvlok Suction Diffuser piping before the system is put into normal operation.
protects your pump and saves you Flow data values are based on flow of clean water at
money on your overall installed cost ambient temperatures. The pressure drop across the
diffuser basket strainer, 50% clogged, is approximately
while offering you these advantages: twice as great as that of a clean strainer.
SAVES SPACE: NOTE 2. Suction Diffuser baskets need a routine maintanence
program to maintain system efficiency.
Mounts directly to the pump. Length is
ideal for header spacing, reducing the FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
4.62
2.0
need for additional fittings.
SAVES LABOR AND MATERIAL:
HEAD LOSS IN FT. OF WATER

/2"
PRESSURE DROP IN PSI
The lightweight compact design is easily
11
1.0 2.31
10"
4" 2"
installed with no need for welding.
8"
6" x "
6"
x4
16" 12" x 1
3"
5"
1.85
/2"
0.8
x
8" x
4" x
21
10"
5" x " & 6"
12"
5" x x 4"
IMPROVES PUMP PERFORMANCE:
x1
8" &
0.6 1.38
&
3" &
8" &
5" &
0" &
2" &
4
4"
/2"
The one-piece diffuser vane and strainer
6" x
x1
x1
3" x
8" x
21
design reduces flow turbulence,
10"
14"
0.4 0.92
3" x
streamlines the flow, and traps any
0.69
hazardous foreign material to better
protect your pump. 0.2 0.46
60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000 4000
PIPE SUPPORT LUG STANDARD FLOW THROUGH SUCTION-DIFFUSER GPM
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
BOLTS: COATINGS:
SAE J429, Grade 5, Zinc Electroplated Rust inhibiting paint Color: ORANGE (standard)
ISO 898-1, Class 8.8, Zinc Electroplated followed by a Yellow Chromate Dip GASKETS: Materials
HEAVY HEX NUTS: Properties as designated in accordance with ASTM D 2000
ASTM A563, Grade A, Zinc Electroplated q Grade “E” EPDM (Green color code)
ISO 898-2, Class 8.8, Zinc Electroplated followed by a Yellow Chromate Dip -40°F to 230°F (Service Temperature Range)(-40°C to 110°C)
STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS & NUTS: Recommended for water service, diluted acids, alkalies solutions,
Stainless steel bolts and nuts are also available. Contact an Anvil oil-free air and many other chemical services.
Representative for more information NOT FOR USE IN PETROLEUM APPLICATIONS.
HOUSING: q Grade “EP” EPDM (Green and Red color code)
Sizes 21⁄2" x 2 1⁄2" through 10" x 8": -40°F to 250°F (Service Temperature Range)(-40°C to 121°C)
Carbon steel Schedule 40 conforming to ASTM A 53, Grade B. Recommended for water service, diluted acids, alkalies solutions,
Sizes 10" x 10" through 16" x 14": oil-free air and many other chemical services.
Carbon steel .375" standard weight wall conforming to ASTM A 53, Grade B. NOT FOR USE IN PETROLEUM APPLICATIONS.
For hot water applications the use of Gruvlok Extreme Temperature
DIFFUSER BASKET:
lubricant is recommended. NSF-61 Certified for cold and hot water
Stainless steel type 304, #16 perforated plate with 3⁄16” diameter holes. (51%
applications up through 12".
open area). Pre-Filter: Stainless steel type 304 screen - 16 mesh. (removable).
q Grade “T” Nitrile (Orange color code) -20°F to 180°F
COUPLINGS: (Service Temperature Range)(-29°C to 82°C)
Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Recommended for petroleum applications. air with oil vapors and
FLANGES: vegetable and mineral oils.
Carbon steel class 150# conforming to ASME B 16.5. NOT FOR USE IN HOT WATER OR HOT AIR.
DRAIN & GAGE PLUGS:
Carbon steel square head plugs conforming to ASME B16.11.
PROJECT INFORMATION APPROVAL STAMP

Project: q Approved
Address: q Approved as noted
Contractor: q Not approved
Engineer: Remarks:
Submittal Date:
Notes 1:
Notes 2:
GL-7.16
FIG. 7250 C-E
Suction Diffuser
OAH
FIG. 7250
OAW
FLOW
T-O
Chilled water 10x6 CLR C-O

OAL
SIZES 21/2" X 21/2" thru 16" x 14"
FIGURE 7250 SUCTION DIFFUSER

System Pump OAW Orifice Max.
Nominal Approx.
O.D. Side Side C-E C-O OAL OAH Flange CLR T-O Cylinder Working
Size Wt. Each
(Grooved) (Flanged) O.D. Open Area Pressure
In./DN(mm) In./mm In./DN(mm) In./DN(mm) In./mm In./mm In./mm In./mm In./mm In./mm In./mm In. Sq./cm. Sq. PSI/bar Lbs./Kg
21⁄2 x 21⁄2 2.875 x 2.875 21⁄2 21⁄2 5 8 131⁄2 9 7 131⁄2 21⁄4 48 300 32
65 x 65 73.0 x 73.0 65 65 127 203 343 229 178 343 57 310 20.7 14.5
3x2 3.500 x 2.375 3 2 5 8 131⁄2 9 6 131⁄2 21⁄4 42 300 34
80 x 50 88.9 x 60.3 80 50 127 203 343 229 152 343 57 271 20.7 15.4
3 x 21⁄2 3.500 x 2.875 3 21⁄2 5 8 131⁄2 9 7 131⁄2 21⁄4 48 300 34
80 x 65 88.9 x 73.0 80 65 127 203 343 229 178 343 57 310 20.7 15.4
1 1 1 13
3x3 3.500 x 3.500 3 3 5 8 13 ⁄2 9 7 ⁄2 10 ⁄4 2 ⁄16 58 300 35
80 x 80 88.9 x 88.9 80 80 127 203 343 229 191 260 71 374 20.7 15.9
1 1 1
4x2 4.500 x 2.375 4 2 5 8 13 ⁄2 9 6 13 ⁄2 2 ⁄4 48 300 35
100 x 50 114.3 x 60.3 100 50 127 203 343 229 152 343 57 310 20.7 15.9
1 1 1 1 1
4 x 2 ⁄2 4.500 x 2.875 4 2 ⁄2 5 8 13 ⁄2 9 7 13 ⁄2 2 ⁄4 48 300 36
100 x 65 114.3 x 73.0 100 65 127 203 343 229 178 343 57 310 20.7 16.3
1 1 1 13
4x3 4.500 x 3.500 4 3 5 8 13 ⁄2 9 7 ⁄2 10 ⁄4 2 ⁄16 58 300 37
100 x 80 114.3 x 88.9 100 80 127 203 343 229 191 260 71 374 20.7 16.8
4x4 4.500 x 4.500 4 4 61⁄2 101⁄2 171⁄2 113⁄4 9 131⁄2 35⁄16 94 300 70
100 x 100 114.3 x 114.3 100 100 165 267 445 298 229 343 84 607 20.7 31.8
5x4 5.563 x 4.500 5 4 61⁄2 101⁄2 171⁄2 113⁄4 9 131⁄2 35⁄16 94 300 72
125 x 100 141.3 x 114.3 125 100 165 267 445 298 229 343 84 607 20.7 32.7
5x5 5.563 x 5.563 5 5 61⁄2 101⁄2 171⁄2 133⁄4 10 131⁄2 45⁄16 117 300 75
125 x 125 141.3 x 141.3 125 125 165 267 445 349 254 343 110 755 20.7 34.0
1 1 1 3 1 1 5
6x3 6.625 x 3.500 6 3 6 ⁄2 10 ⁄2 17 ⁄2 11 ⁄4 7 ⁄2 13 ⁄2 3 ⁄16 94 300 72
150 x 80 168.3 x 88.9 150 80 165 267 445 298 191 343 84 607 20.7 34.0
1 1 1 3 1 5
6x4 6.625 x 4.500 6 4 6 ⁄2 10 ⁄2 17 ⁄2 11 ⁄4 9 13 ⁄2 3 ⁄16 94 300 73
150 x 100 168.3 x 114.3 150 100 165 267 445 298 229 343 84 607 20.7 33.1
1 1 1 3 1 5
6x5 6.625 x 5.563 6 5 6 ⁄2 10 ⁄2 17 ⁄2 13 ⁄4 10 13 ⁄2 4 ⁄16 117 300 75
150 x 125 168.3 x 141.3 150 125 165 267 445 349 254 343 110 755 20.7 34.0
3 1 1 3 1 5
6x6 6.625 x 6.625 6 6 7 ⁄4 13 ⁄4 21 ⁄2 14 ⁄4 11 16 ⁄4 4 ⁄16 167 300 120
150 x 150 168.3 x 168.3 150 150 197 337 546 375 279 413 110 1,077 20.7 54.4
8x5 8.625 x 5.563 8 5 73⁄4 131⁄4 211⁄2 143⁄4 10 161⁄4 45⁄16 167 300 128
200 x 125 219.1 x 141.3 200 125 197 337 546 375 254 413 110 1,077 20.7 58.1
8x6 8.625 x 6.625 8 6 73⁄4 131⁄4 211⁄2 143⁄4 11 161⁄4 45⁄16 167 300 130
200 x 150 219.1 x 168.3 200 150 197 337 546 375 279 413 110 1,077 20.7 59.0
8x8 8.625 x 8.625 8 8 9 151⁄4 241⁄2 173⁄4 131⁄2 193⁄4 53⁄8 266 300 190
200 x 200 219.1 x 219.1 200 200 229 387 622 451 343 502 137 1,716 20.7 86.2
1 1 1 3 3
10 x 6 10.750 x 6.625 10 6 9 15 ⁄4 24 ⁄2 17 ⁄2 11 19 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 266 300 195
250 x 150 273.1 x 168.3 250 150 229 387 622 445 279 502 137 1,716 20.7 88.5
1 1 1 1 3 3
10 x 8 10.750 x 8.625 10 8 9 15 ⁄4 24 ⁄2 17 ⁄2 13 ⁄2 19 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 266 300 200
250 x 200 273.1 x 219.1 250 200 229 387 622 445 343 502 137 1,716 20.7 90.7
1 5 3 3
10 x 10 10.750 x 10.750 10 10 10 17 ⁄4 28 19 ⁄8 16 23 ⁄4 6 ⁄8 384 300 225
250 x 250 273.1 x 273.1 250 250 254 438 711 498 406 603 162 2,477 20.7 102.1
1 5 1 3 3
12 x 8 12.750 x 8.625 12 8 10 17 ⁄4 28 19 ⁄8 13 ⁄2 23 ⁄4 6 ⁄8 384 300 225
300 x 200 323.9 x 219.1 300 200 254 438 711 498 343 603 162 2,477 20.7 102.1
12 x 10 12.750 x 10.750 12 10 10 171⁄4 28 195⁄8 16 233⁄4 63⁄8 384 300 230
300 x 250 323.9 x 273.1 300 250 254 438 711 498 406 603 162 2,477 20.7 104.3
12 x 12 12.750 x 12.750 12 12 11 241⁄4 36 201⁄2 19 341/4 8 695 300 382
300 x 300 323.9 x 323.9 300 300 279 616 914 521 483 870 203 4,484 20.7 173.3
14 x 10 14.000 x 10.750 14 10 11 241⁄4 36 201⁄2 16 341/4 8 695 300 382
350 x 250 355.6 x 273.1 350 250 279 616 914 521 406 870 203 4,484 20.7 173.3
1 1 1
14 x 12 14.000 x 12.750 14 12 11 24 ⁄4 36 20 ⁄2 19 34 /4 8 695 300 382
350 x 300 355.6 x 323.9 350 300 279 616 914 521 483 870 203 4,484 20.7 173.3
1
14 x 14 14.000 x 14.000 14 14 12 26 ⁄4 39 23 21 36 9 817 300 467
350 x 350 355.6 x 355.6 350 350 305 667 991 584 533 914 229 5,271 20.7 211.8
1
16 x 14 16.000 x 14.000 16 14 12 26 ⁄4 39 23 21 36 9 817 300 467
400 x 350 406.4 x 355.6 400 350 305 667 991 584 533 914 229 5,271 20.7 211.8
Other sizes available on special request. Contact an Anvil Rep. for ordering information. 1. “CLR” Dimension indicates clearance needed for diffuser basket removal.
Dimensions may vary Contact an Anvil Rep. for certified values. 2. Drain Holes: (End Cap)
Not for use in copper systems. -3⁄4" NPT for sizes 21⁄2 x 21⁄2 thru 6 x 5, -1" NPT for sizes 6 x 6 thru 16 x 14.
Product must be supported by pipe supports (supports not included). 3. Pipe Support - Use 11⁄4" SCH. 40 Pipe for 21⁄2" thru 10" pipe and 2" SCH. 40 Pipe for 12" and
larger diffusers.
4. “Orifice Cylinder Open Area” is the total area of the opening in the diffuser basket after the pre-
filter screen has been removed.
GL-7.16
SERIES 7700
Butterfly Valve
AN-7721-3 AN-7722-3
Series 7700 butterfly valve Series 7700 butterfly valve
with 10 position lever lock with gear operator
Used in commercial grooved-end piping systems 2" through 12". The stem-to-disc connection provides zero backlash. The high
The uniqueness of the Series 7700 Gruvlok Butterfly Valve strength, corrosion resistant, stainless steel stems are blow-out
begins with the spherical bore of the disc seat area. This proof. Each stem is fitted with a secondary seal that also
facilitates a constant DISC-TO-SEAT loading that maintains a provides a lifetime lubrication chamber.
leak tight stem seal regardless of disc position. The stem sealing The Series 7700 valve is designed with the contractor in mind.
force is constant through the full disc cycle and operating The valve body is a rugged one-piece casting with an integral
torques are kept low which increases valve life. The design mounting base for gear operator or handle actuation, while
provides a bubble tight seal from full vacuum to 300 psi when providing room for a minimum of 2" of pipe insulation. The
the valve is closed. The valve is rated for dead-end service to a valve is designed and manufactured to meet or exceed the
full pressure rating of 300 psi. Manufactured without silicone requirements of MSS SP-67.
Series 7700 available upon special request. For data on fire protection listings/approvals, contact your
Anvil representative.
NSF/ANSI 61
2" - 10" Series 7700

Certified to NSF/ANSI 61
(cold water) and Annex G
LEAD FREE

Project: q Approved
Engineer: Remarks:
Submittal Date:
Notes 1:
Notes 2:
GL-3.19
SERIES 7700
Butterfly Valve
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS 5
1. BODY: Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12
Body Coating: Nylon (For nylon coating chemical compatibility, see table on page 5.)
2. DISC: Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A 536 Grades 65-45-12 3
Disc Encapsulation: Properties as specified in accordance with ASTM D 2000.
❏ Grade E (EPDM): Service Temperature Range -40°F to +230°F (-40°C to +110°C)
Recommended for water service, dilute acids, alkalies, oil-free air and
many chemical services.
NOT FOR USE IN PETROLEUM SERVICES. 6
❏ Grade T (Nitrile): Service Temperature Range -20°F to +180°F (-29°C to +82°C)
Recommended for petroleum products, air with oil vapors, vegetable oils
7
and mineral oils.
NOT FOR USE IN HOT WATER SERVICES.
3, 4. UPPER AND LOWER SHAFT: Type 416 Stainless Steel 1

5. O-RINGS: Compatible with disc coating
6, 7. TOP AND BOTTOM BRONZE SLEEVE BUSHINGS: 8", 10", & 12" Valve only
7 5
4
GRUVLOK BUTTERFLY VALVE SERIES 7700 (ORDERING INFORMATION)
Sample Part Number 8" A N 77 2 1- 3 Special

8" AN7721-3 ––>
Size Body Style Body Coating Series Disc Coating Operator Stem
2" - 12" A N - Nylon 77-77XX 1 - Nitrile (Grade T) 0 - None 3 - 416 S.S. MWS - Manufactured
without Silicone
2 - EPDM (Grade E) 1 - 10 Pos. L/Lock
2 - Gear Operator
D - Infinite Pos. w/Memory Stop
4 - Short 10 Pos. L/lock Operator
NOTE: For operator safety, hand levers on 8", 10" and 12" valves are not available.
GL-4.19
SERIES 7700
Butterfly Valve
SERIES 7700 BUTTERFLY VALVE DIMENSIONS

Valve Size (ANSI/DN)
Dimensions
2 21⁄2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12
In./mm 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300
O.D. 23⁄8 27⁄8 31⁄2 41⁄2 59⁄16 65⁄8 85⁄8 103⁄4 123⁄4
In./mm 60.3 73.0 88.9 114.3 141.3 168.3 219.1 273.1 323.9
33⁄16 313⁄16 313⁄16 45⁄8 513⁄16 513⁄16 51⁄4 61⁄4 61⁄2
A
81.0 96.8 96.8 117.3 147.6 147.6 133.4 158.8 165.1
3 33⁄16 313⁄16 41⁄4 5 51⁄2 615⁄16 8 9
B
75.4 80.8 96.5 108.5 126.5 138.9 175.8 202.9 229.4
43⁄16 43⁄8 51⁄16 53⁄8 57⁄8 63⁄8 73⁄4 91⁄2 101⁄2
C
105.9 111.3 129.0 136.7 149.4 161.8 196.9 240.3 266.7
11⁄16 11⁄16 11⁄16 11⁄16 11⁄16 11⁄16 15⁄8 15⁄8 15⁄8
D
26.9 26.9 26.9 26.9 26.9 26.9 41.1 41.1 41.1
7 7 7 7 7 7 3 3 3
⁄16 ⁄16 ⁄16 ⁄16 ⁄16 ⁄16 ⁄4 ⁄4 ⁄4
E
11.1 11.1 11.1 11.1 11.1 11.1 19.1 19.1 19.1
3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5
F
76.2 76.2 76.2 76.2 76.2 76.2 127.0 127.0 127.0
9 9 9 9 7 7
⁄16 ⁄16 ⁄16 ⁄16 ⁄8 ⁄8 1 11⁄4 11⁄4
G
14.3 14.3 14.3 14.3 22.2 22.2 25.4 31.8 31.8
7 7 7 7 7 7 1 1 1
⁄16 ⁄16 ⁄16 ⁄16 ⁄16 ⁄16 ⁄2 ⁄2 ⁄2
H
11.1 11.1 11.1 11.1 11.1 11.1 13.5 13.5 13.5
1
- - - - - ⁄8 13⁄8 17⁄8 23⁄4
J
- - - - - 3.3 34.8 47.0 70.1
3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5
K
76.2 76.2 76.2 76.2 76.2 76.2 127.0 127.0 127.0
55⁄16 51⁄2 61⁄4 61⁄2 7 71⁄2 - - -
L
135.1 140.5 158.2 165.9 178.6 191.0 - - -
101⁄2 101⁄2 101⁄2 101⁄2 101⁄2 101⁄2 - - -
M
266.7 266.7 266.7 266.7 266.7 266.7 - - -
713⁄16 8 811⁄16 9 91⁄2 10 1415⁄16 165⁄8 2011⁄16
N
198.0 203.3 221.1 228.7 241.4 253.9 379.2 422.7 525.3
4 4 4 4 4 4 81⁄16 81⁄16 115⁄8
P
102.1 102.1 102.1 102.1 102.1 102.1 204.5 204.5 295.4
11⁄2 11⁄2 11⁄2 11⁄2 11⁄2 11⁄2 25⁄16 25⁄16 29⁄16
R
38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 38.2 58.5 58.5 65.5
2 2 2 2 2 2 25⁄8 25⁄8 31⁄4
S
51.0 51.0 51.0 51.0 51.0 51.0 66.0 66.0 83.0
65⁄16 65⁄16 65⁄16 65⁄16 65⁄16 65⁄16 1013⁄16 1013⁄16 1313⁄16
T
160.3 160.3 160.3 160.3 160.3 160.3 275.3 275.3 350.3
5 5 5 5 5 5 12 12 18
U
127.0 127.0 127.0 127.0 127.0 127.0 304.8 304.8 457.2
Note: 3" or 5" handwheels may be included on valves sizes 2" - 4". Contact your Anvil Rep. for additional information.
GL-4.19
SERIES 7700
Butterfly Valve Performance Data
Maximum Working Pressure Rating: 300 PSI
(Commercial Applications - Sizes 2" thru 12")
CV VALUES HEADLOSS EQUIVALENT LENGTH OF PIPE

Valve Disc Position (degrees open) Equivalent Feet of Pipe* Max.
O.D. Valve C=120
Size 25° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 80° 90° O.D. Insulating
Size
In./mm In./mm
Sch. 10 Sch. 30 Sch. 40 Thickness
In./mm In./mm Ft./m In./mm
2 2.375 4 7 19 44 48 80 111 158
50 60.3 0.3 0.5 1.3 3.0 3.3 5.5 7.7 10.9 2 2.375 5.8 - 4.7 2
21⁄2 2.875 9 14 34 78 84 142 196 280 50 60.3 1.8 - 1.4 50
65 73.0 0.6 1.0 2.3 5.4 5.8 9.8 13.5 19.3 21⁄2 2.875 5.1 - 3.7 21⁄2
3 3.500 14 20 50 112 128 215 285 400 65 73.0 1.6 - 1.1 65
80 88.9 1.0 1.4 3.4 7.7 8.8 14.8 19.7 27.6 3 3.500 9.6 - 7.2 2
80 88.9 2.9 - 2.2 50
4 4.500 29 41 100 239 250 420 582 826
100 114.3 2.0 2.8 6.9 16.5 17.2 29.0 40.1 57.0 4 4.500 7.5 - 5.7 21⁄2
100 114.3 2.3 - 1.7 65
5 5.563 62 76 182 415 445 780 1,100 1,480
125 141.3 4.3 5.2 12.5 28.6 30.7 53.8 75.8 102.0
5 5.563 7.0 - 5.6 21⁄2
125 141.3 2.1 - 1.7 65
6 6.625 96 141 325 755 809 1,370 1,920 2,678
6 6.625 6.1 - 4.8 21⁄2
150 168.3 6.6 9.7 22.4 52.1 55.8 94.5 132.4 184.6
150 168.3 1.9 - 1.5 65
8 8.625 172 252 592 1,365 1,460 2,430 3,410 4,819 8 8.625 6.3 5.7 - 21⁄2
200 219.1 11.9 17.4 40.8 94.1 100.7 167.5 235.1 332.3 200 219.1 1.9 1.7 - 65
10 10.750 230 328 792 1,825 1,962 3,260 4,590 6,431 10 10.750 11.3 10.2 - 3
250 273.1 15.9 22.6 54.6 125.8 135.3 224.8 316.5 443.4 250 273.1 3.4 3.1 - 80
12 12.750 418 604 1,440 3,350 3,590 5,980 8,750 11,947 12 12.750 8.4 7.4 - 31⁄2
300 323.9 28.8 41.6 99.3 231.0 247.5 412.3 603.3 823.7 300 323.9 2.6 2.3 - 90
* The equivalent feet of pipe is based on the Hazen and Williams

formula and the flow rates typically used with each size valve.
PRESSURE DROP (PSI) VS. (GPM)

VALVE WEIGHT AND TORQUE VALUES 5.0
4.0
Valve * Approx. Operating Pressure
O.D.
Size Wt. Ea. 50 PSIG 100 PSIG 150 PSIG 200 PSIG 300 PSIG 3.0
NOMINAL PRESSURE DROP IN POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH (PSI)
In./mm In./mm Lbs./Kg †Breakaway Torque (In. - Lbs) / N-m

2.0
2 2.375 5 72 90 100 120 200
50 60.3 2.3 8.1 10.2 11.3 13.6 22.6
E
21⁄2 2.875 10 105 126 144 162 250

LV
E
E
65 73.0 4.5 11.9 14.2 16.3 18.3 28.2

LV
LV
LV
LV
VA
LV
3 3.500 11 126 139 168 195 425

VA
VA
VA
VA
VA
1.0
CH
0.9
80 88.9 5.0 14.2 15.7 19.0 22.0 48.0
H
CH
CH
CH
IN
0.8
NC
NC
4 4.500 15 265 285 320 355 800

E
N
N
N
/2
0.7
LV
3I
4I
5I
6I
2I
100 114.3 6.8 29.9 32.2 36.2 40.1 90.4

21
0.6
VA
5 5.563 20 491 578 615 674 850

E
0.5
CH
125 141.3 9.0 55.5 65.3 69.5 76.2 96.0

LV
N
6 6.625 46 625 678 760 820 1,650

VA
0.4
8I
150 168.3 20.9 70.6 76.6 85.9 92.7 186.4

CH
E
LV
0.3
8 8.625 68 1,170 1,400 1,640 1,760 3,200
IN
VA
200 219.1 30.8 132.2 158.2 185.3 198.9 361.6

10
10 10.750 78 1,930 2,375 2,860 3,100 6,000

CH
0.2
250 273.1 35.4 218.1 268.4 323.2 350.3 678.0
IN
12 12.750 91 2,900 3,420 4,760 5,600 11,000

12
300 323.9 41.3 327.7 386.4 537.9 632.8 1,242.9

† These values are valid for water and lubricating fluid service only. 0.1
100 200 300 400 500 700 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 7000 10000
Contact Anvil for information on torques for dry and non-lubricating fluid service. FLOW RATE IN GALLONS PER MINUTE (GPM)
* Weights may vary based on valve options selected.
GL-3.14
SERIES 7700
Butterfly Valve
Chemical compatibility with various chemicals, as a function of temperature ˚F (Fahrenheit)
NYLON COATING
Coating Condition after 18 months immersion
RESISTANCE RESISTANCE RESISTANCE
68˚F 104˚F 140˚F 176˚F 68˚F 104˚F 140˚F 176˚F 68˚F 104˚F 140˚F 176˚F
Alcohols Various Products (cont’d.) Hydrocarbons (cont’d.)
benzyl alcohol L P P P solutions or emulsions of D.D.T. tulene G G*** L L
butanol G*** L P or lindane hudroxy-quinoline G xylene G G*** L L
(agricultural sprays)
ethanol (pure) G*** G L Inorganic Bases
soap solution G
glycerine (pure) G G L P ammonium hydroxide (concentrated) G G G G
stearin G G G
glycol G G G P ammonia (liquid or gas) G G
solvent naptha G G G***
methanol (pure) G*** L P lime-wash G G G
natural gas G G
Chlorinated solvents potassium hydroxide (50%) G L P P
turpentine G G G***
carbon tetrachloride P sodium hydroxide (5%) G G L
vinegar G
methyl bromide G P wine G sodium hydroxide (10%) G L L
methyl chloride G P Inorganic Acids sodium hydroxide (50%) G L P P
perchloroethylene G G L chromic acid (10%) P P P P Organic acids & anhydrides
trichloroethane L P hydrochlorhic acid (1%) G L P P acetic acid L P P P
trichloreothylene G L hydrochlorhic acid (10%) G L P P acetic anhydrie L P P P
Phenols nitric acid (all concentrations) P P P P citric acid G G L P
P P P P phosphoric acid (50%) G L P P formic acid P P P P
Various Organic Compounds sulphuric acid (1%) G L L P lactic acid G G G L
anethole G sulphuric acid (10%) G L P P oleic acid G G G L
carbon disulphide G*** L** P sulphur trioxide L P P P oxalic acid G G L P
diacetone alcohol G G*** L P Other Inorganic products picric acid L P P P
dimethyl formamide G G L agriculture sprays G G tartaric acid (saturated solution) G G G L
ethylene chlorhydrin P P bleach solutions L P P P uric acid G G G L
ethylene oxide G G L P bromine P P Inorganic Salts
furfurol G G*** L P chlorine P P P P alum G G G
glucose G G G G fluorine P P P P aluminium sulphate G G G G
tetraethyl lead G hydrogen G G G G ammonium nitrate G G G
tetrahydrofurare G G L hydrogen peroxide (20 volumes) G L barium chloride G G G G
Salts, esters, ethers mercury G G G G calcium arsenate (concentrated G G G
amyl acetate G G G L oxygen G G L P solutions or slurries)
butyl acetate G G G L ozone L P P P calcium chloride G G G G
diethyl ether G potassium permanganate (5%) P P calcium sulphate G G L
dioctylphosphate G G G L sea water G G G copper sulphate G G G G
dioctylphthalate G G G L soda water G G G G diammonium phosphate G G L
ethyl acetate G G G sulphur G G magnesium chloride (50%) G G G G
fatty acid esters G G G G water G G G L potassium ferrocyanide G G G
methyl acetate G G G Aldehydes & Ketones potassium nitrate G* L* P P
methyl sulfate G L acetaldehyde G L P potassium sulphate G G G G
tributylphosphaate G G G L acetone G G*** L P sodium carbonate G G L P
tricresylphosphate GG G G L benzaldehyde G L P sodium chloride (saturated) G G G G
Various Products cyclohexanone G L P sodium silicate G G G
beer G formaldehyde (technical grade) G L P sodium sulphide G L L
cider G methylethylketone (MEK) G G L P trisodium phosphate G G G G
crude petroleum G G G*** methylethylketone (MIBK) G G L P Organic bases
diesel fuel G G G*** Hydrocarbons aniline (pure) L P P P
fruit juices G G acetylene G G G G diethanolamine (20%) G G*** G*** L
fuel-oil G G G benzene G G*** L pyridine (pure) L P P P
greases G G G G butane G G G urea G G L L
ground nut oil G G cyclohexane G G G L
high octane gasoline G G G*** decaline G G G L
kerosene (paraffin) G G G*** HFA (Forane®) G LEGEND
linseed cake G G G G hexane G G G * = Slight Yellowing
milk G G G G methane G G G ** = Yellowing
*** = Swelling observed
mustard G naphthalene G G G L
G = Good
normal gasoline G G G*** propane G G G L = Limited
oils G G G G styrene G G*** P = Poor
GL-4.19
MODEL 768G
Grooved-end “Wye” Strainer
Grooved-end Wye-Strainers are designed to strain debris and

foreign matter from piping systems and thus provide
inexpensive protection for costly pumps, meters and other
components. The Strainer can be installed quickly and easily
with two mechanical couplings and the straight flow through
design provides for lower pressure drop. This strainer features
a stainless steel screen that is secured with an end cap and
mechanical coupling. Cleaning and maintenance of the screen
can be accomplished easily by removing the coupling. The
Strainer is suitable for vertical and horizontal installations.
BODY: Ductile iron ASTM A 536 Grade 65-45-12
END CAP: Ductile iron ASTM A 536 Grade 65-45-12
SCREEN:
Values for flow of water at +60°F (+16°C)
2" - 3" Type 304 Stainless Steel to ASTM A 240
1
⁄16" (1.6 mm) perforations (12 mesh) Where:
Q = Flow (GPM)
4" - 12" Type 304 Stainless Steel to ASTM A 240 CV = flow coefficient
1
⁄8" (3.2 mm) perforations (6 mesh) ∆P = Pressure drop (PSI)
COUPLING: Ductile iron ASTM A 536 Grade 65-45-12
GASKET:
EPDM Temperature range -40°F - +230°F (-40° to 110°C) - Standard
Nitrile Temperature range -20°F to 180°F (-29° to 82°C) - Special Request
BLOW DOWN PORT:
2"- 5": 1" tapped with plug,
6" - 12": 11⁄2" tapped with plug
Strainer baskets need a routine maintenance program to maintain efficiency and to prevent
excess pressure drop caused by a clogged screen.

Project: q Approved
Engineer: Remarks:
Submittal Date:
Notes 1:
Notes 2:
GL-9.15
MODEL 768G chilled water 8"
Grooved-end “Wye” Strainer condenser water 8"
A
FIGURE 768G GROOVED-END “WYE” STRAINER
Dimensions
Nominal Working Cv Approx.
O.D. D
Size Pressure A B C Values Wt. Each
Plug Size
In./DN(mm) In./mm PSI/bar In./mm In./mm In./mm In./mm Lbs./Kg
2 2.375 300 93⁄4 63⁄4 47⁄8 1 59 11

50 60.3 20.7 248 171 124 25 5.0
B 21⁄2 2.875 300 103⁄4 73⁄8 51⁄4 1 92 14
65 73.0 20.7 273 187 133 25 6.4
3 3.500 300 113⁄4 83⁄16 57⁄8 1 162 20
80 88.9 20.7 298 208 149 25 9.1
4 4.500 300 141⁄4 10 71⁄2 1 284 32
100 114.3 20.7 362 254 191 25 14.5
5 5.563 300 161⁄2 111⁄4 81⁄4 1 410 46
125 141.3 20.7 419 286 210 25 20.9
6 6.625 300 181⁄2 133⁄8 97⁄8 11⁄2 770 70
150 168.3 20.7 470 340 251 38 31.8
8 8.625 300 24 163⁄4 125⁄16 11⁄2 1010 155
200 219.1 20.7 610 425 313 38 70.3
10 10.750 300 27 19 1311⁄16 11⁄2 1800 230
250 273.1 20.7 686 483 348 38 104.3
12 12.750 300 30 2215⁄16 1611⁄16 11⁄2 2800 335
D C 300 323.9 20.7 762 583 424 38 152.0
Plug Size Screen
Not for use in copper systems.
Removal
• Pressure ratings listed are CWP (cold water pressure) or maximum working pressure within the
service temperature range of the gasket used in the coupling. This rating may occasionally differ
from maximum working pressures listed and/or approved by UL, ULC, and/or FM as testing condi-
tions and test pipes differ.
• Maximum working pressure and end loads listed are total of internal and external pressures and
loads based on Sch. 40 steel pipe with roll grooves to ANSI C606-97 specifications.
• For one time field test only the maximum joint working pressure may be increased 11⁄2 times the
figures shown.
• Warning: Piping systems must always be depressurized and drained before attempting disassembly
and or removal of any components.
GL-9.15
COUPLINGS
FIG. 7000
Lightweight Flexible Coupling
The Fig. 7000 Lightweight Flexible Coupling is designed for

applications where system flexibility is desired.
The Fig. 7000 Coupling is approximately 30% lighter in weight
than the Fig. 7001 Coupling, and allows for working pressure
ratings up to 600 psi (41.4 bar).
The Figure 7000 Lightweight Flexible Coupling is intended for use
in several applications. See gasket Grade Index for gasket
recommendations.
For Listings/Approval Details and Limitations,
visit our website at www.anvilintl.com or
contact an Anvil® Sales Representative. See technical data section for design factors.
BOLTS: q Grade “T” Nitrile (Orange color code)
SAE J429, Grade 5, Zinc Electroplated 20°F to 180°F (Service Temperature Range)(-29°C to 82°C)
ISO 898-1, Class 8.8, Zinc Electroplated followed by a Yellow Chromate Dip Recommended for petroleum applications. air with oil vapors and
HEAVY HEX NUTS: vegetable and mineral oils.
ASTM A563, Grade A, Zinc Electroplated NOT FOR USE IN HOT WATER OR HOT AIR
ISO 898-2, Class 8.8, Zinc Electroplated followed by a Yellow Chromate Dip q Grade “O” Fluoro-Elastomer (Blue color code)
STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS & NUTS: Size Range: 1" - 8" (C style only)
304SS bolts and nuts are available as a standard option. -20°F to 300°F (Service Temperature Range)(-29°C to 149°C)
(316SS are available for special order). Recommended for high temperature resistance to oxidizing acids,
petroleum oils, hydraulic fluids, halogenated hydrocarbons and
HOUSING: lubricants.
Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12
q Grade “L” Silicone (Red color code)
COATINGS: Size Range: 1" - 8" (C style only)
q Rust inhibiting paint – Color: ORANGE (standard) -40°F to 350°F (Service Temperature Range)(-40°C to 177°C)
q Hot Dipped Zinc Galvanized (optional) Recommended for dry, hot air and some high temperature chemical
q Other Colors Available (IE: RAL3000 and RAL9000) services.
For other Coating requirements contact an Anvil Representative.
GASKET TYPE:
GASKETS: Materials q Standard C Style (1" - 8")
✔
Properties as designated in accordance with ASTM D 2000 q Flush Gap (1" - 8")
✔
q Grade “EP” EPDM (Green and Red color code) LUBRICATION:
-40°F to 250°F (Service Temperature Range)(-40°C to 121°C) q Standard Gruvlok
✔
Recommended for water service, diluted acids, alkalies solutions, q Gruvlok XtremeTM (Do Not use with Grade “L”)
oil-free air and many other chemical services.
NOT FOR USE IN PETROLEUM APPLICATIONS.
For hot water applications the use of Gruvlok Extreme Temperature
lubricant is recommended. NSF-61 Certified for cold and hot water
applications up through 12".

Project: q Approved
Engineer: Remarks:
Submittal Date:
Notes 1:
Notes 2:
GL-7.16
COUPLINGS
FIG. 7000
Z
Y
chilled water pipe and

condenser water pipe X
FIGURE 7000 COUPLING
Nominal Max. End Range of Deflection from CL Coupling Dimensions Coupling Bolts Specified Torque § Approx.
Size O.D. Working Max.
Load Pipe End
Pressure † Separation Per Coupling of Pipe X Y Z Qty. Size Min. Max. Wt. Ea.
In./DN(mm) In./mm PSI/bar Lbs./kN In./mm Degrees(˚)-Minutes(') In./ft-mm/m In./mm In./mm In./mm In./mm Ft.-Lbs./N-m Lbs./Kg
1 1.315 600 815 0-1⁄32 1° 22' 0.29 23⁄8 41⁄4 13⁄4 2 3

⁄8 x 21⁄4 30 45 1.3
25 33.4 41.4 3.62 0-0.79 23.8 60 108 44 M10 x 57 40 60 0.6
11⁄4 1.660 600 1,299 0-1⁄32 1° 5' 0.23 23⁄4 43⁄8 13⁄4 2 3
⁄8 x 21⁄4 30 45 1.4
32 42.2 41.4 5.78 0-0.79 18.8 70 111 44 M10 x 57 40 60 0.6
11⁄2 1.900 600 1,701 0-1⁄32 0° 57' 0.20 3 45⁄8 13⁄4 2 3
⁄8 x 21⁄4 30 45 1.5
40 48.3 41.4 7.57 0-0.79 16.5 76 117 44 M10 x 57 40 60 0.7
2 2.375 600 2,658 0-1⁄32 0° 45' 0.16 31⁄2 51⁄2 13⁄4 2 3
⁄8 x 21⁄4 30 45 1.7
50 60.3 41.4 11.82 0-0.79 13.1 89 140 44 M10 x 57 40 60 0.8
21⁄2 2.875 600 3,895 0-1⁄32 0° 37' 0.13 4 53⁄4 13⁄4 2 3
⁄8 x 21⁄4 30 45 1.9
65 73.0 41.4 17.33 0-0.79 10.9 102 146 44 M10 x 57 40 60 0.9
3 O.D. 2.996 600 4,230 0-1⁄32 0° 36' 0.13 4 61⁄8 13⁄4 2 3
⁄8 x 21⁄4 30 45 2.3
76.1 76.1 41.4 18.82 0-0.79 10.4 102 156 44 M10 x 57 40 60 1.0
3 3.500 600 5,773 0-1⁄32 0° 31' 0.11 45⁄8 63⁄4 13⁄4 2 1
⁄2 x 23⁄4 80 100 2.9
80 88.9 41.4 25.68 0-0.79 8.9 117 171 44 M12 x 70 110 150 1.3
31⁄2 4.000 600 7,540 0-1⁄32 0° 27' 0.09 51⁄8 75⁄8 13⁄4 2 1
⁄2 x 3 80 100 3.1
90 101.6 41.4 33.54 0-0.79 7.8 130 194 44 M12 x 76 110 150 1.4
41⁄4 O.D. 4.250 600 8,512 0-3⁄32 1° 16' 0.26 51⁄2 73⁄4 2 2 1
⁄2 x 3 80 100 4.0
108.0 108.0 41.4 37.86 0-2.38 22.0 140 197 51 M12 x 76 110 150 1.8
4 4.500 600 9,543 0-3⁄32 1° 12' 0.25 57⁄8 81⁄8 2 2 1
⁄2 x 3 80 100 4.6
100 114.3 41.4 42.45 0-2.38 20.8 149 206 51 M12 x 76 110 150 2.1
51⁄4 O.D. 5.236 500 10,766 0-3⁄32 1° 2' 0.21 61⁄2 91⁄8 2 2 5
⁄8 x 31⁄2 100 130 5.7
133.0 133.0 34.5 47.89 0-2.38 17.9 165 232 51 M16 x 85 135 175 2.6
51⁄2 O.D. 5.500 500 11,879 0-3⁄32 0° 59' 0.20 63⁄4 93⁄8 2 2 5
⁄8 x 31⁄2 100 130 6
139.7 139.7 34.5 52.84 0-2.38 17.0 171 238 51 M16 x 85 135 175 2.7
5 5.563 500 12,153 0-3⁄32 0° 58' 0.20 7 95⁄8 2 2 5
⁄8 x 31⁄2 100 130 6.1
125 141.3 34.5 54.06 0-2.38 16.8 178 244 51 M16 x 85 135 175 2.8
61⁄4 O.D. 6.259 500 15,384 0-3⁄32 0° 51' 0.18 71⁄2 103⁄8 2 2 5
⁄8 x 31⁄2 100 130 6.7
159.0 159.0 34.5 68.43 0-2.38 14.9 191 264 51 M16 x 85 135 175 3.0
61⁄2 O.D. 6.500 500 16,592 0-3⁄32 0° 50' 0.17 73⁄4 103⁄4 2 2 5
⁄8 x 31⁄2 100 130 7.0
165.1 165.1 34.5 73.80 0-2.38 13.1 197 273 51 M16 x 85 135 175 3.2
6 6.625 500 17,236 0-3⁄32 0° 49' 0.17 8 11 2 2 5
⁄8 x 31⁄2 100 130 8.1
150 168.3 34.5 76.67 0-2.38 14.1 203 279 51 M16 x 85 135 175 3.7
8 8.625 500 29,213 0-3⁄32 0° 37' 0.13 101⁄2 1213⁄16 21⁄2 2 3
⁄4 x 41⁄2 130 180 14.2
200 219.1 34.5 129.95 0-2.38 10.9 264 337 60 M20 x 110 175 245 6.4
NOTES: For additional details see “Coupling Data Chart Notes” in the Introduction Section of the Gruvlok Catalog.
Range of Pipe End Separation and Angular Deflection values are for roll grooved pipe and may be doubled for cut groove § – For additional Bolt Torque information, see the Technical Data Section of the Gruvlok Catalog.
pipe. See the Technical Data Section of the Gruvlok Catalog. See Installation & Assembly directions on next page.
For Misalignment, Deflection and Curve Layout Calculations, refer to the Technical Data Section of the Gruvlok Catalog. Not for use in copper systems.
†
Maximum Working Pressure Rating is for schedule 40 steel pipe. For light wall, stainless steel, aluminum and ISO pipe
pressure ratings, please refer to the technical data section.
GL-9.15
COUPLINGS
FIG. 7000
1 CHECK & LUBRICATE GASKET—

Check gasket to be sure it is compatible
for the intended service. Apply a thin coating
2 GASKET INSTALLATION— Slip the
gasket over the pipe end, making sure the
gasket lip does not overhang the pipe end.
3 ALIGNMENT— After aligning the two
pipe ends together, pull the gasket into
position, centering it between the grooves on
of Gruvlok lubricant to the exterior surface and each pipe. Gasket should not extend into the
sealing lips of the gasket. Be careful that foreign groove on either pipe.
particles do not adhere to lubricated surfaces.
4 HOUSINGS— With one nut unthreaded

to the end of the bolt, unthread the other
nut completely and swing the coupling housing
5 TIGHTEN NUTS— Tighten the nuts
alternately and equally to the specified bolt
torque. The housing bolt pads must make metal-
6 ASSEMBLY IS COMPLETE—
Visually inspect the pipe joint to assure the
coupling keys are fully engaged in the pipe
halves over the gasket, making sure the housing to-metal contact. grooves and the bolt pads are in firm even metal-
keys engage the grooves. Insert the bolt and to-metal contact on both sides of the coupling.
CAUTION: Uneven tightening may cause the gasket to pinch.
turn the nuts finger tight.
CAUTION: Proper torquing of coupling bolts is required to obtain specified performance. Over torquing the bolts may result in damage to the bolt and/or casting which could result in pipe
joint separation. Under torquing the bolts may result in lower pressure retention capabilities, lower bend load capabilities, joint leakage and pipe joint separation. Pipe joint separation may
result in significant property damage and serious injury.
GL-3.14
COUPLINGS
FIG. 7401
Rigidlok® Coupling
The Fig. 7401 Rigidlok Coupling is an ideal connector for service

and applications that require a rigid connection.
The Fig. 7401 Rigidlok coupling utilizes a technologically
advanced housing design that conforms to and grips the pipe.
Coupling installation is fast and easy, remove only one nut and
swing the housing over the gasket and into the grooves. The
exclusive Guidelok® feature automatically separates the grooved
pipe ends and guides the coupling into position as the bolts are lightweight pipe, as well as with grooved-end fittings and valves.
tightened. Precisely sized and oriented tines in the housing key The Rigidlok Coupling provides a rigid pipe connection allowing
section firmly grip the pipe. The combination of these designed in pipe hanging practices per ASME B31 pipe codes.
features produce a secure, rigid pipe joint connection.
The Fig. 7401 Rigidlok Coupling allows for a maximum working
The Fig. 7401 Rigidlok Coupling is designed for use with roll pressure of 750 psi (51.7 bar) when used on standard wall roll or
grooved or cut grooved standard weight and roll grooved cut grooved pipe.
SAE J429, Grade 5, Zinc Electroplated (standard) NOT FOR USE IN DRINKING WATER
HEAVY HEX NUTS: -20°F to 180°F (Service Temperature Range)(-29°C to 82°C)
SAE A563, Grade A, Zinc Electroplated (standard) Recommended for petroleum applications. air with oil vapors and
vegetable and mineral oils.
HARDWARE KITS: NOT FOR USE IN HOT WATER OR HOT AIR
q 304 Stainless Steel (available in sizes up to 3/4")
Kit includes: (2) Bolts per ASTM A193, Grade B8 and q Grade “O” Fluoro-Elastomer (Blue color code)
(2) Heavy Hex Nuts per ASTM A194, Grade 8. NOT FOR USE IN DRINKING WATER
Size Range: 1" - 12" (C style only)
HOUSING: 20°F to 300°F (Service Temperature Range)(-29°C to 149°C)
Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Recommended for high temperature resistance to oxidizing acids,
COATINGS: petroleum oils, hydraulic fluids, halogenated hydrocarbons and
q Rust inhibiting paint – Color: ORANGE (standard)
✔ lubricants.
q Hot Dipped Zinc Galvanized (optional)
✔ q Grade “L” Silicone (Red color code)
q Other Colors Available (IE: RAL3000 and RAL9000)
✔ NOT FOR USE IN DRINKING WATER
For other Coating requirements contact an Anvil Representative. Size Range: 1" - 12" (C style only)
GASKETS: -40°F to 350°F (Service Temperature Range)(-40°C to 177°C)
Properties as designated in accordance with ASTM D 2000 Recommended for dry, hot air and some high temperature chemical
services. Contact an Anvil Representative for availability.
q Grade “EP” EPDM (Green and Red color code)
-40°F to 250°F (Service Temperature Range)(-40°C to 121°C) GASKET TYPE:
Recommended for water service, diluted acids, alkalies solutions, q C Style (1" - 24")
✔
oil-free air and many other chemical services. q Flush Gap (1" - 24")
NOT FOR USE IN PETROLEUM APPLICATIONS. LUBRICATION:
For hot water applications the use of Gruvlok Xtreme™ Temperature q Standard
✔
lubricant is recommended. NSF-61. q Gruvlok XtremeTM (Do Not use with Grade “L”)

Project: q Approved
Engineer: Remarks:
Submittal Date:
Notes 1:
Notes 2:
GL-9.18
COUPLINGS
FIG. 7401
Rigidlok® Coupling Z Y Z
Y
Y Z
X
X X
SIZES 1 1/2" - 14" SIZE 16" SIZES 18" - 24"
FIGURE 7401 RIGIDLOK COUPLING
Nominal Max. Working Max. Range of Coupling Dimensions Coupling Bolts Approx.
O.D. Pipe End
Size Pressure† End Load Separation X Y Z Qty. Size Wt. Ea.
In./DN(mm) In./mm PSI/bar Lbs./kN In./mm In./mm In./mm In./mm In./mm Lbs./kg
11⁄2 1.900 750 2,126 0-1⁄32 3 51⁄8 17⁄8 2 3
⁄8 x 21⁄4 1.8
40 48.3 51.7 9.46 0-0.79 76 130 48 M10 x 57 0.8
2 2.375 750 3,323 0-1⁄32 31⁄2 55⁄8 17⁄8 2 3
⁄8 x 21⁄2 2.4
50 60.3 51.7 14.78 0-0.79 89 143 48 M10 x 63 1.1
21⁄2 2.875 750 4,869 0-1⁄32 4 61⁄8 17⁄8 2 3
⁄8 x 21⁄2 2.9
65 73.0 51.7 21.66 0-0.79 102 156 48 M10 x 63 1.3
3 O.D. 2.996 750 5,207 0-1⁄32 41⁄8 61⁄8 17⁄8 2 3
⁄8 x 21⁄2 3.4
76.1 76.1 51.7 23.52 0-0.79 105 156 48 M10 x 63 1.5
3 3.500 750 7,216 0-1⁄32 43⁄4 71⁄4 17⁄8 2 1
⁄2 x 3 3.6
80 88.9 51.7 32.10 0-0.79 121 184 48 M12 x 76 1.6
4 4.500 750 11,928 0-3⁄32 57⁄8 83⁄8 21⁄8 2 1
⁄2 x 3 5.0
100 114.3 51.7 53.06 0-2.38 149 213 54 M12 x 76 2.3
51⁄2 O.D. 5.500 750 17,819 0-3⁄32 7 93⁄4 21⁄8 2 5
⁄8 x 31⁄2 6.9
139.7 139.7 51.7 79.26 0-2.38 178 248 54 M16 x 85 3.1
5 5.563 750 18,229 0-3⁄32 7 10 21⁄8 2 5
⁄8 x 31⁄2 6.9
125 141.3 51.7 81.09 0-2.38 178 254 54 M16 x 85 3.1
61⁄2 O.D. 6.500 750 24,887 0-3⁄32 8 11 21⁄8 2 5
⁄8 x 31⁄2 7.6
165.1 165.1 51.7 110.70 0-2.38 203 279 54 M16 x 85 3.4
6 6.625 750 25,854 0-3⁄32 81⁄8 111⁄8 21⁄8 2 5
⁄8 x 31⁄2 7.9
150 168.3 51.7 115.00 0-2.38 206 283 54 M16 x 85 3.6
8 8.625 600 35,056 0-3⁄32 101⁄2 141⁄8 25⁄8 2 3
⁄4 x 41⁄2 15.9
200 219.1 41.4 155.94 0-2.38 267 359 67 M20 x 110 7.2
10 10.750 500 45,381 0-3⁄32 127⁄8 171⁄2 25⁄8 2 1x6 25.6
250 273.1 34.5 201.87 0-2.38 327 445 67 M24 x 150 11.6
12 12.750 400 51,070 0-3⁄32 15 191⁄2 25⁄8 2 7
⁄8 x 6 30.5
300 323.9 27.6 227.17 0-2.38 381 495 67 M22 x 150 13.8
14 14.000 300 46,181 0-3⁄32 161⁄4 193⁄4 3 2 7
⁄8 x 51⁄2 36.1
350 355.6 20.7 205.43 0-2.38 413 502 76 M22 x 140 16.4
16 16.000 300 60,319 0-3⁄32 181⁄8 221⁄4 3 3 7
⁄8 x 51⁄2 42.0
400 406.4 20.7 268.31 0-2.38 460 565 76 M22 x 140 19.1
18 18.000 300 76,341 0-3⁄32 201⁄2 243⁄8 31⁄8 4 1x4 51.6
450 457.2 20.7 339.58 0-2.38 521 619 79 M24 x 100 23.4
20 20.000 300 94,248 0-3⁄32 23 267⁄8 31⁄8 4 1x4 68.3
500 508.0 20.7 419.23 0-2.38 581 683 79 M24 x 100 31.0
24 24.000 250 113,097 0-3⁄32 271⁄8 307⁄8 31⁄8 4 1x4 89.3
600 609.6 17.2 503.08 0-2.38 689 784 79 M24 x 100 40.5
NOTE: For additional details see “Coupling Data Chart Notes” in the Introduction Section of the Gruvlok Catalog.
Range of Pipe End Seperation values are for roll grooved pipe and may be doubled for cut groove pipe. See Installation & Assembly directions on next page.
†
Maximum Working Pressure Rating is for schedule 40 steel pipe. For light wall, stainless steel, aluminum and ISO pipe
GL-9.18
COUPLINGS
FIG. 7401
Rigidlok® Coupling
WARNING
• Read and understand all instructions before use.
• Ensure system is drained and depressurized before installation or service.
• Use appropriate personal protective equipment.
Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious personal injury and/or property damage.
Check pipe ends for proper grooved dimensions and to ensure that the pipe is free of indentations, projections, or other imperfections that would prevent
proper sealing of the gasket.

Check gasket to be sure it is compatible for
the intended service. Apply a thin coating of
gasket over the pipe end making sure the
pipe ends, pull the gasket into position
centering it between the grooves on each pipe.
Gruvlok lubricant to the exterior surface and Gasket should not extend into the groove on
sealing lips of the gasket. Some applications On couplings 10" and larger it may be easier to either pipe.
require lubrication of the entire gasket surface. turn the gasket inside out then
Be careful that foreign particles do not adhere lubricate and slide the On couplings 10" and
to lubricated surfaces. gasket over the pipe end as larger, flip or roll the gasket
shown. into centered position.
NOTICE: Gruvlok Xtreme™ Lubricant must be applied
when used in dry pipe systems or freezer applications.
separation. Pipe joint separation may result in significant
property damage and serious injury.
4 HOUSINGS— Remove one nut and bolt

and loosen the other nut. Place one housing
over the gasket, making sure the housing keys fit
5 TIGHTEN NUTS— Securely tighten
nuts alternately and equally, keeping the
gaps at the bolt pads evenly spaced.
6 ASSEMBLY IS COMPLETE— Visually
inspect the pipe joint to assure the coupling
keys are fully engaged in the pipe grooves. The
into the pipe grooves. Swing the other housing bolt pads are to have equal gaps on each side of
over the gasket and into the grooves on both NOTICE: Uneven tightening may cause the gasket to the coupling.
pinch. Gasket should not be visible between segments
pipes, making sure the tongue and recess of each NOTICE: Visually inspect both sides of the coupling to
after bolts are tightened.
housing is properly mated. Reinsert the bolt and ensure gaps between bolt pads are evenly spaced and
run-up both nuts finger tight. are parallel. Any deviations must be corrected before
ANSI SPECIFIED BOLT TORQUE placing coupling into service.
Bolt Size Wrench Size Specified Bolt Torque *

In. In. Ft.-Lbs NOTICE: Sizes 16" and larger are cast in multiple
3 11
⁄8 ⁄16 30-45 segments. To install the larger sizes align the tongue
1
⁄2 7
⁄8 80-100 and pocket of the couplings appropriately and tighten
5
⁄8 11⁄16 100-130 the nuts alternately to the specified bolt torque. When
3 properly assembled there will be a small equal gap
⁄4 11⁄4 130-180
between the adjacent bolt pads.
1 15⁄8 200-250
* Non-lubricated bolt torques.
GL-1.19
COUPLINGS
FIG. 7001
Flexible Coupling
The Gruvlok® Fig. 7001 Coupling forms a flexible grooved end pipe joint connection with the
versatility for a wide range of applications. Services include mechanical and plumbing, process
piping, mining and oil field piping, and many others. The coupling design supplies optimum
strength for working pressures to 1000 PSl (69 bar) without excessive casting weight.
The flexible design eases pipe and equipment installation while providing the designed-in
benefit of reducing pipeline noise and vibration transmission without the addition of special
components. To ease coupling handling and assembly and to assure consistent quality, sizes
1" through 14" couplings have two 180° segment housings, 16" have three 120˚ segment housings,
and 18" through 24" sizes have four 90° segment housings, while the 28" O.D. and 30" O.D. For Listings/Approval Details and Limitations,
couplings have six 60° segment housings. The 28" O.D. and 30" O.D. are weld-ring couplings. visit our website at www.anvilintl.com or
contact an Anvil® Sales Representative.
SAE J429, Grade 5, Zinc Electroplated -20°F to 180°F (Service Temperature Range)(-29°C to 82°C)
ISO 898-1, Class 8.8, Zinc Electroplated followed by a Yellow Chromate Dip Recommended for petroleum applications. Air with oil vapors and
HEAVY HEX NUTS: vegetable and mineral oils.
ASTM A563, Grade A, Zinc Electroplated NOT FOR USE IN HOT WATER OR HOT AIR
ISO 898-2, Class 8.8, Zinc Electroplated followed by a Yellow Chromate Dip q Grade “O” Fluoro-Elastomer (Blue color code)
STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS & NUTS: Size Range: 1" - 12" (C style only)
304SS bolts and nuts are available as a standard option. 20°F to 300°F (Service Temperature Range)(-29°C to 149°C)
(316SS are available for special order). Recommended for high temperature resistance to oxidizing acids,
petroleum oils, hydraulic fluids, halogenated hydrocarbons and
HOUSING: lubricants.
Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12
q Grade “L” Silicone (Red color code)
COATINGS: Size Range: 1" - 12" (C style only)
q Rust inhibiting paint – Color: ORANGE (standard) -40°F to 350°F (Service Temperature Range)(-40°C to 177°C)
q Hot Dipped Zinc Galvanized (optional) Recommended for dry, hot air and some high temperature chemical
q Other Colors Available (IE: RAL3000 and RAL9000) services. Contact an Anvil Representative for availability.
For other Coating requirements contact an Anvil Representative.
GASKET TYPE:
GASKETS: Materials q C Style (1" - 30")
Properties as designated in accordance with ASTM D 2000 q Flush Gap (1" - 24")
✔
q Grade “EP” EPDM (Green and Red color code)
✔ LUBRICATION:
-40°F to 250°F (Service Temperature Range)(-40°C to 121°C) q Standard
✔
Recommended for water service, diluted acids, alkalies solutions, q Gruvlok XtremeTM (Do Not use with Grade “L”)
oil-free air and many other chemical services.
NOT FOR USE IN PETROLEUM APPLICATIONS. WORKING PRESSURE, END LOAD, PIPE END SEPARATION &
For hot water applications the use of Gruvlok Extreme Temperature DEFLECTION FROM CENTER LINE:
lubricant is recommended. NSF-61 Certified for cold and hot water Based on standard wall steel pipe with cut or roll grooves in accordance
applications up through 12". with Gruvlok specifications. See technical data section for design factors.
Fig. 7001 with Standard Gasket Fig. 7001 with Flush Gap Gasket

Project: q Approved
Engineer: Remarks:
Submittal Date:
Notes 1:
Notes 2:
GL-7.16
COUPLINGS
FIG. 7001 condenser
water
Y Z
Flexible Coupling Z
Y
Z
Y
X
X
X
SIZES 1" - 14" SIZES 16" - 24" SIZES 28" - 30"
FIGURE 7001 FLEXIBLE COUPLING

Nominal Max. Work. Max. End Range of Deflection from CL Coupling Dimensions Bolt Dimensions* Specified Torque § Approx.
O.D. Pipe End
Size Pressure† Load Separation Per Coupling of Pipe X Y Z Qty. Size Min. Max. Wt. Ea.
In./DN(mm) In./mm PSI/bar Lbs./kN In./mm Degrees(˚)-Minutes(') In./ft-mm/m In./mm In./mm In./mm In./mm Ft.-Lbs/N-m Lbs./kg
1 1.315 1000 1,358 0-1⁄32 1° 22' 0.29 21⁄2 41⁄2 17⁄8 2 3
⁄8 x 21⁄4 30 45 1.3
25 33.4 68.9 6.04 0-0.79 23.8 64 114 48 M10 x 57 40 60 0.6
11⁄4 1.660 1000 2,164 0-1⁄32 1° 5' 0.23 23⁄4 41⁄2 17⁄8 2 3
⁄8 x 21⁄4 30 45 1.4
32 42.2 68.9 9.63 0-0.79 18.8 70 114 48 M10 x 57 40 60 0.6
11⁄2 1.900 1000 2,835 0-1⁄32 0° 57' 0.20 3 45⁄8 17⁄8 2 3
⁄8 x 21⁄4 30 45 1.5
40 48.3 68.9 12.61 0-0.79 16.5 76 117 48 M10 x 57 40 60 0.7
2 2.375 1000 4,430 0-1⁄32 0° 45' 0.16 35⁄8 61⁄8 17⁄8 2 1
⁄2 x 3 80 100 3.1
50 60.3 68.9 19.71 0-0.79 13.1 92 156 48 M12 x 76 110 150 1.4
21⁄2 2.875 1000 6,492 0-1⁄32 0° 37' 0.13 41⁄4 61⁄2 17⁄8 2 1
⁄2 x 3 80 100 3.7
65 73.0 68.9 28.88 0-0.79 10.9 108 165 48 M12 x 76 110 150 1.7
3 O.D. 2.996 1000 7,050 0-1⁄32 0° 36' 0.13 41⁄4 63⁄4 17⁄8 2 1
⁄2 x 3 80 100 4.3
76.1 76.1 68.9 31.36 0-0.79 10.4 108 171 48 M12 x 76 110 150 2.0
3 3.500 1000 9,621 0-1⁄32 0° 31' 0.11 47⁄8 71⁄8 17⁄8 2 1
⁄2 x 3 80 100 4.3
80 88.9 68.9 42.80 0-0.79 8.9 124 181 48 M12 x 76 110 150 2.0
31⁄2 4.000 1000 12,566 0-1⁄32 0° 27' 0.09 51⁄4 81⁄4 17⁄8 2 5
⁄8 x 31⁄2 100 130 5.1
90 101.6 68.9 55.90 0-0.79 7.8 133 210 48 M16 x 89 135 175 2.3
4 4.500 1000 15,904 0-3⁄32 1° 12' 0.25 61⁄4 83⁄4 2 2 5
⁄8 x 31⁄2 100 130 6.8
100 114.3 68.9 70.75 0-2.38 20.8 159 222 51 M16 x 89 135 175 3.1
5 5.563 1000 24,306 0-3⁄32 0° 58' 0.20 71⁄4 111⁄4 2 2 3
⁄4 x 41⁄2 130 180 9.6
125 141.3 68.9 108.12 0-2.38 16.8 184 286 51 M20 x 110 175 245 4.4
61⁄2 O.D. 6.500 1000 33,183 0-3⁄32 0° 50' 0.17 81⁄4 113⁄4 2 2 3
⁄4 x 41⁄2 130 180 11.8
165.1 165.1 68.9 147.61 0-2.38 14.4 210 298 51 M20 x 110 175 245 5.4
6 6.625 1000 34,472 0-3⁄32 0° 49' 0.17 85⁄8 113⁄4 2 2 3
⁄4 x 41⁄2 130 180 11.8
150 168.3 68.9 153.34 0-2.38 14.1 219 298 51 M20 x 110 175 245 5.4
8 8.625 800 46,741 0-3⁄32 0° 37' 0.13 11 143⁄8 23⁄8 2 7
⁄8 x 51⁄2 180 220 21.7
200 219.1 55.2 207.91 0-2.38 10.9 279 365 60 M22 x 140 245 300 9.8
10 10.750 800 72,610 0-3⁄32 0° 30' 0.11 131⁄8 165⁄8 25⁄8 2 7
⁄8 x 51⁄2 180 220 27.0
250 273.0 55.2 322.99 0-2.38 8.7 333 422 67 M22 x 140 245 300 12.2
12 12.750 800 102,141 0-3⁄32 0° 25' 0.09 151⁄2 185⁄8 25⁄8 2 7
⁄8 x 6 180 220 35.0
300 323.9 55.2 454.35 0-2.38 7.3 394 473 67 M22 x 150 245 300 15.9
14 14.000 300 46,181 0-3⁄32 0° 23' 0.08 161⁄8 201⁄2 3 2 7
⁄8 x 51⁄2 180 220 37.0
350 355.6 20.7 205.43 0-2.38 6.7 410 521 76 M22 x 140 245 300 16.8
16 16.000 300 60,319 0-3⁄32 0° 20' 0.07 181⁄8 227⁄8 3 4 1x4 200 250 50.0
400 406.4 20.7 268.31 0-2.38 5.9 460 581 76 * - - 22.7
18 18.000 300 76,341 0-3⁄32 0° 18' 0.06 211⁄8 253⁄8 31⁄8 4 1x4 200 250 72.0
450 457.2 20.7 339.58 0-2.38 5.2 537 645 79 * - - 32.7
20 20.000 300 94,248 0-3⁄32 0° 16' 0.06 23 281⁄4 31⁄8 4 11⁄8 x 41⁄2 225 275 82.0
500 508.0 20.7 419.23 0-2.38 4.7 584 718 79 * - - 37.2
24 24.000 300 135,717 0-3⁄32 0° 13' 0.05 27 323⁄8 31⁄8 4 11⁄8 x 41⁄2 225 275 90.0
600 609.6 20.7 603.70 0-2.38 3.9 686 822 79 * - - 40.8
28" I.D. 28.875 150 98,226 0-3⁄32 0° 11' 0.04 331⁄2 351⁄2 31⁄8 6 1 x 51⁄2 200 250 105.0
733.4 733.4 10.3 436.93 0-2.38 3.2 851 902 79 * - - 47.6
30" I.D. 31.00 150 113,215 0-3⁄32 0° 10' 0.04 333⁄4 381⁄4 35⁄8 6 1 x 51⁄2 200 250 137.0
787.4 787.4 10.3 503.61 0-2.38 3.0 857 972 92 * - - 62.1
NOTES: For additional details see “Coupling Data Chart Notes” in the Introduction Section of the Gruvlok Catalog.
Range of Pipe End Separation and Angular Deflection values are for roll grooved pipe and may be doubled for cut groove * Available in ANSI or metric bolt sizes only as indicated.
pipe. See the Technical Data Section of the Gruvlok Catalog. § – For additional Bolt Torque information, see the Technical Data Section of the Gruvlok Catalog.
For Misalignment, Deflection and Curve Layout Calculations, refer to the Technical Data Section of the Gruvlok Catalog. See Installation & Assembly directions on next page.
†
Maximum Working Pressure Rating is for schedule 40 steel pipe. For light wall, stainless steel, aluminum and ISO pipe Not for use in copper systems.
GL-7.16
COUPLINGS
FIG. 7001
Flexible Coupling

Check gasket to be sure it is compatible
for the intended service. Apply a thin coating
gasket over the pipe end making sure the
pipe ends, pull the gasket into position
centering it between the grooves on each
of Gruvlok lubricant to the exterior surface and should not extend into the groove on either
On couplings 10" and larger it may be
sealing lips of the gasket. Be careful that foreign pipe.
easier to turn the gasket
particles do not adhere to lubricated surfaces. On couplings 10" and
inside out then lubricate
and slide the gasket over larger, flip or roll the
the pipe end as shown. gasket into centered
position.
4 HOUSINGS— Place the coupling

housing halves over the gasket making sure
the housing keys engage the grooves. Insert
5 TIGHTEN NUTS— Tighten the nuts
alternately and equally to the specified bolt
torque. The housing bolt pads must make metal-
6 ASSEMBLY IS COMPLETE—
Visually inspect the pipe joint to assure
the coupling keys are fully engaged in the pipe
bolts and turn nuts finger tight. to-metal contact. grooves and the bolt pads are in firm even metal-
to-metal contact on both sides of the coupling.
CAUTION: Uneven tightening may cause the
gasket to pinch.
NOTE: The housings for sizes 16” and larger are cast in four or more segments. CAUTION: Proper torquing of coupling bolts is required to obtain specified performance.
Over torquing the bolts may result in damage to the bolt and/or casting which could
TO INSTALL: Loosely pre-assemble the segments into two “Housing Halves” making sure
result in pipe joint separation. Under torquing the bolts may result in lower pressure
that the alignment tang(s) and slot(s) on the bolt pad(s) are properly mated. Install the
retention capabilities, lower bend load capabilities, joint leakage and pipe joint separation.
“Housing Halves” as shown in steps 4 & 5. The coupling is properly installed when all bolt
Pipe joint separation may result in significant property damage and serious injury.
pads are firmly together - Metal-to-Metal.
GL-3.14
ES-007
For Non-Health Hazard Applications

ESI West Rock
Job Name –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Contractor –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Chil-Pak
Job Location –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Approval ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Engineer –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Contractor’s P.O. No. –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Approval –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Representative –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Series 007
Double Check Valve Assemblies
Sizes: 1⁄2" – 2"
Series 007 Double Check Valve Assemblies are designed to
protect drinking water supplies from dangerous cross-connec-
tions in accordance with national plumbing codes and water
authority requirements for non-potable service applications 1" 007M1QT
such as irrigation, fireline, or industrial processing. Only those
cross-connections identified by local inspection authorities as
non-health hazard shall be allowed the use of an approved
double check valve assembly.
Check with local authority having jurisdiction regarding vertical
orientation, frequency of testing or other installation requirements.
The valve shall meet the requirements of ASSE Std. 1015 and
AWWA Std. C510. Approved by the Foundation for Cross-
Connection Control and Hydraulic Research at the University of
Southern California.
1" 007M1QT-S
Features
• Ease of maintenance — only one cover
Test Cocks
• Top entry
• Replaceable seats and seat discs
• Modular construction
• Compact design
• Cast bronze body construction — 1⁄2" – 2"
• Top mounted ball valve test cocks
• Low pressure drop
• No special tools required for servicing
• 1⁄2" – 1" have tee handles
First Check Second Check
Specifications Module Assembly Module Assembly
A Double Check Valve Assembly shall be installed at each The 007 Series features a modular design concept which facilitates
noted location. The assembly shall consist of two positive complete maintenance and assembly by retaining the spring load.
seating check modules with captured springs and rubber
seat discs. The check module seats and seat discs shall be Now Available
replaceable. Service of all internal components shall be through
a single bronze or stainless steel access cover secured with
WattsBox Insulated Enclosures.
stainless steel bolts. The assembly shall also include two resil- For more information, send for literature ES-WB.
ient seated isolation valves; four top mounted, resilient seated
test cocks. The assembly shall meet the requirements of ASSE
Std. 1015 and AWWA Std. C510. Approved by the Foundation NOTICE
for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research at the Inquire with governing authorities for local installation
University of Southern California. Assembly shall be a Watts requirements
Series 007.
Watts product specifications in U.S. customary units and metric are approximate and are provided for reference only. For precise measurements,
please contact Watts Technical Service. Watts reserves the right to change or modify product design, construction, specifications, or materials with-
out prior notice and without incurring any obligation to make such changes and modifications on Watts products previously or subsequently sold.
Pressure — Temperature Suffix:
⁄ " – 2"
12 S - bronze strainer
Temperature Range: 33°F – 180°F (0.5°C – 82°C). LF - without shutoff valves
Maximum Working Pressure: 175psi (12.1 bar). SH - stainless steel ball valve handles
HC - 21⁄2" inlet/outlet fire hydrant fittings (2" valve)
Standards Prefix:
ASSE Std. 1015, AWWA Std. C510 U - Union connections
IAPMO PS31, CSA B64.5
Approvals
† ASSE, AWWA, IAPMO, CSA, UPC
▲ Approved by the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control
and Hydraulic Research at the University of Southern
California.
• Models LF and S are not listed.
◆ UL Classified (LF models only) 3⁄4" – 2"
(except 007M3LF)
* Horizontal and vertical “flow up" approval on all sizes
Dimensions – Weights
Models
Sizes: 1⁄2" – 2"
As
A
C
B
*Bs
D
F R T
*Subscript ‘S’ = strainer model
Model Size Dimensions Weight

A B C D F G R T
in. in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm lbs. kgs.
†▲ 007QT ⁄
12 10 254 45⁄8 117 27⁄16 62 — — 5 127 33⁄8 85 25⁄16 59 21⁄16 52 4.5 2
†▲ 007M3QT 3⁄4 111⁄8 282 4 102 31⁄8 79 — — 63⁄16 157 37⁄16 87 21⁄8 54 15⁄16 33 5 2.3
†▲ 007M1QT 1 131⁄4 337 51⁄8 130 4 102 — — 71⁄2 191 33⁄8 85 111⁄16 43 111⁄16 43 12 5.4
†▲ 007M2QT 11⁄4 163⁄8 416 5 127 35⁄16 84 — — 91⁄2 241 5 127 3 76 2 50 15 6.8
†▲ 007M2QT 11⁄2 163⁄4 425 47⁄8 124 31⁄2 89 — — 93⁄4 248 513⁄16 148 31⁄8 79 211⁄16 68 15.9 7.2
†▲ 007M1QT 2 191⁄2 495 61⁄4 159 4 102 — — 133⁄8 340 61⁄8 156 37⁄16 87 211⁄16 68 25.7 11.7
• 007QT-S 1⁄2 13 330 6 152 27⁄16 62 3 76 5 127 33⁄8 85 25⁄16 59 21⁄16 52 5.5 2.5
• 007M3QT-S 3⁄4 141⁄2 368 61⁄8 156 31⁄8 79 3 76 63⁄16 157 37⁄16 87 21⁄8 54 15⁄16 33 6.7 3.1
• 007M1QT-S 1 1715⁄16 157 73⁄4 197 4 102 31⁄4 83 71⁄2 191 33⁄8 85 111⁄16 43 111⁄16 43 14 6.4
• 007M2QT-S 11⁄4 211⁄2 546 71⁄16 179 35⁄16 84 31⁄2 83 91⁄2 241 5 127 3 76 2 50 19 8.6
• 007M2QT-S 11⁄2 251⁄16 637 71⁄16 179 31⁄2 89 33⁄4 95 93⁄4 248 513⁄16 148 31⁄8 79 211⁄16 68 19.6 8.9
• 007M1QT-S 2 271⁄4 692 83⁄4 222 4 102 4 102 133⁄8 340 61⁄8 156 37⁄16 87 211⁄16 68 33.5 15.2
Suffix HC — Fire Hydrant Fittings dimension “A" = 231⁄2" (594mm)
Dimensions – Weights
1" U007M1QT
Union Tailpiece Union Tailpiece

Union Nut Union Nut
Sizes: 1⁄2" – 2"

Model Size Dimensions
A
in. in. mm
U007QT ⁄
12 1213⁄16 326
U007M2QT 3⁄4 1313⁄16 350
U007M2QT 1 165⁄8 422
U007M2QT 11⁄4 203⁄4 527
U007M2QT 11⁄2 211⁄2 546
U007M1QT 2 241⁄2 622
Capacity
As complied from documented Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and
Hydraulic Research at the University of Southern California lab tests.
* Typical maximum system flow rate (7.5 feet/sec., 2.3 meters/sec.)

** UL rated flow
1 2 ⁄ " (15mm) 11⁄2" (40mm)

bars psi
.8 12 *
bars psi
.8 12 *
Pressure Drop
Pressure Drop
.7 10 .7 10
.5 8 .5 8
.4 6 .4 6
.3 4 .3 4
.1 2 .1 2
0 0 0 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 gpm 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 gpm
0 7.6 15.2 22.8 30.4 38 45.6
lpm 0 38 76 114 152 190 228 66 304 342 380 418 456 lpm
5 7.5 10 fps 5 7.5 10 15 fps
1.5 2.5 3.0 mps 1.5 2.5 3.0 4.5 mps
Flow Flow
3 4
bars psi ⁄ " (20mm) 2" (50mm)
1.5 22 * bars psi
.8 12 *
1.2 18 .7 10
Pressure Drop
.5 8
Pressure Drop
.96 14 .4 6
.3 4
.69 10
.1 2
0 0
.41 6 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 gpm
0 95 190 285 380 475 570 665 760 lpm
.14 2 5 7.5 10 15 fps
1.5 2.3 3.0 4.6 mps
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
gpm
0 19 38 57 76 95 114 133 152 171 190
lpm Flow
7.5 15 lps
2.3 4.6 mps
Flow
1" (25mm)
bars psi
1.1 16
*
Pressure Drop
.8 12
.7 10
.5 8
.4 6
.3 4
.1 2
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 gpm
0 19 38 57 76 95 114 133 152 171 190 209 228
lpm
5 7.5 10 15 fps
1.5 2.3 3.0 4.6 mps
Flow
11⁄4" (32mm)
bars psi
1 14 *
.8 12
Pressure Drop
.7 10
.5 8
.4 6
.3 4
.1 2
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
gpm
0 38 76 114 152 190 228 266 304 342 380 418 456
lpm
5 7.5 10 15 fps
1.5 2.3 3.0 4.6 mps
Flow
A Watts Water Technologies Company USA: Tel: (978) 688-1811 • Fax: (978) 794-1848 • www.watts.com
Canada: Tel: (905) 332-4090 • Fax: (905) 332-7068 • www.watts.ca
ES-007 1319 © 2013 Watts

ES-LFX65B
For Residential and Commercial Applications

ESI West Rock
Job Name ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Chil-Pak
Contractor –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Job Location –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Approval ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Engineer –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Contractor’s P.O. No. –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Approval –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Representative –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
LEAD FREE*
Series LFX65B
Water Pressure Reducing Valves**
Adjusting Screw
Sizes: 1⁄2" – 2" (15 – 50mm) Lock Nut
Lock Seal
Series LFX65B Water Pressure Reducing Valves are designed to
reduce incoming water pressure to a sensible level to protect plumb-
ing system components and reduce water consumption.
Spring Washer
The LFX65B features Lead Free* construction to comply with Lead
Free* installation requirements. Spring
The LFX65B is a cartridge style regulator and is orderable three Spring Cage
ways: As a complete, ready-to-install regulator, or as a separate Stem Nut
Rough-in Kit consisting of a Lead Free* cast copper silicon alloy Stem Lock Washer
body with integral strainer, or as a separate Cartridge Assembly. Diaphragm Pressure
Plate LFX65B
The LFX65B delivers superior flow performance with low fall off pres- Diaphragm
sure while reducing flow noise with its engineered seat design. The Base Plate
LFX65B is a 100 percent balanced valve, as inlet pressures fluctuate, Valve Stem
reduced pressure does not. Stem O-ring
The LFX65B incorporates control valve style stem and disc guid- Strainer
ance for accuracy and longevity. It is available with interchangeable
union tailpiece kits in standard-sized solder and threaded tailpieces Seat Cartridge
for Quick-Connect, PEX and CPVC options. The X65B Cartridge
Assemblies are available in standard pressure range of 20 - 80psi Disc
(138 – 552 kPa), preset at the factory to 50psi (345 kPa) or high- Disc Holder
Valve Body
pressure range (HP) of 50 -150psi (345 – 1034 kPa) preset at the
Gauge Port Plug
factory to 100psi (6.9 bar). The standard bypass feature*** permits
the flow of water back through the valve into the main when pres-
sures, due to thermal expansion on the outlet side of the valve, Specifications
exceed the pressure in the main supply. Standard Specifications: A Water Pressure Reducing Valve with
integral strainer shall be installed in the water service pipe near
Features its entrance to the building where supply main pressure exceeds
• Cartridge Style valve enables quick and easy installation or 60psi (413 kPa) to reduce it to 50psi (345 kPa) or lower. The valve
service in-line. shall feature a Lead Free* cast copper silicon alloy body suitable
• Greater flow performance with lower fall off pressure for for water supply pressures up to 400psi (27.6 bar). Provision shall
consistent operation be made to permit the bypass flow of water back through the valve
into the main when pressures, due to thermal expansion on the
• Seat design reduces flow noise
outlet side of the valve, exceed the pressure in the main supply.
• 100% balanced valve, unique to Watts, provides reliable Water Pressure Reducing Valve with built-in bypass check valves
flow performance and integral strainer will be acceptable. Approved valve shall be
• Full size range available rated to 400psi to meet your commercial listed to ASSE 1003 and IAPMO and certified to CSA B356. Valve
and residential applications shall be a Watts Series LFX65B.
• Cartridge Assemblies available in standard and high-pressure (HP)
models *The wetted surface of this product contacted by consumable
water contains less than 0.25% of lead by weight.
• Bypass feature in Cartridge Assembly controls thermal expansion
pressure***. **A water saving test program concluded that reducing the
supply pressure from 80 to 50psi (551-345 kPa) resulted in a
• Standard construction includes sealed spring cage and corrosion
water savings of 30%.
resistant adjusting and cage screws for accessible
outdoor or pit installations *** The bypass feature will not prevent the pressure relief valve
from opening on the hot water supply system with pressures
• High performance thermoplastic integral seat cartridge
above 150psi (10.3 bar).
• Union connection and tailpiece kits for solder, Quick-Connect,
PEX, CPVC and threaded to meet your commercial and residential
applications.
• High temperature resistant reinforced diaphragm for hot water
Watts product specifications in U.S. customary units and metric are approximate and are provided for reference only. For precise measurements,
please contact Watts Technical Service. Watts reserves the right to change or modify product design, construction, specifications, or materials
without prior notice and without incurring any obligation to make such changes and modifications on Watts products previously or subsequently sold.
Models Standards
LFX65B NPT threaded female inlet x NPT female outlet
LFX65BU NPT threaded union inlet x NPT female outlet Certified to ASSE Standard 1003, and listed by ASSE and IAPMO.
LFX65BUS Solder union inlet x NPT female outlet
LFX65BDU Double Union – NPT threaded union female Capacity
inlet and outlet kPa psi Sizes: 1⁄2", 3⁄4", 1" (15, 20, 25mm)
LFX65BDUS Double Union – Solder union inlet and outlet 0 0
LFX65BU-QC Single Union – Quick-Connect union inlet x 14 2

NPT female outlet* 28 4
LFX65BDU-QC Double Union – Quick-Connect union inlet 41 6
(25mm)
and outlet=
Reduced Pressure Drop

55 8
LFX65BDU-CPVC Double Union - CPVC union inlet x CPVC
69 10
union outlet== (15mm) (20mm)
83 12
LFX65BDU-PEX Double Union - PEX union inlet x PEX union
outlet= 96 14
LFX65B-HP High Pressure – NPT threaded female inlet x 110 16

NPT female outlet 124 18
=For 138 20
sizes ⁄ ", ⁄ ", 1 (15, 20, 25mm) only
12 34
==For 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
gpm
sizes 3⁄4", 1" (20, 25mm) only 0 19 38 57 76 95 114
lpm
Flow
Materials
kPa psi Sizes: 11⁄4", 11⁄2", 2" (32, 40, 50mm)
Body: Lead Free* cast copper silicon alloy 0 0
Seat: Thermoplastic cartridge 14 2
Integral Strainer: Stainless steel 28 4
(50mm)
Diaphragm: Reinforced EPDM Reduced Pressure Drop 41 6
Valve Disc: EPDM 55 8
Pressure – Temperature 69 10
(40mm)
83 12
Temperature Range: 33°F – 180°F (0.5°C – 82°C) (32mm)
96 14
Maximum Working Pressure: 400psi (27.6 bar) 110 16
Adjustable Reduced Pressure Range: 20–80psi (138 – 552 kPa) 124 18
Standard Reduced Pressure Setting: 50psi (345 kPa) 138 20
HP Reduced Pressure Range: 50-150psi (345 – 1034 kPa) 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 gpm
0 76 151 227 303 379 454 530
lpm
HP Reduced Pressure Setting: 100psi (6.9 bar) Flow
Options D
Add Suffix
G Gauge tapping, 1⁄4" (8mm)
GG Gauge tapping and 160psi
(11.0 bar) gauge
HP High pressure range 50–150psi
(3.4 – 10.3 bar)
B
Dimensions — Weights
A
E C
F
SIZE (DN) dimensions WEIGHTS
A B (MAX) STD B (MAX) HP C D (DIA) E (Threaded) E (Sweat) E (QC) F (Threaded) F (Sweat) F (QC)

in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm lbs. kgs.
⁄ 15 3 76.7 57⁄16 137.7
1 2 611⁄16 169.9 15⁄16 32.8 27⁄16 61.2 311⁄16 93.0 35⁄8 91.9 41⁄2 115 45⁄16 109.2 41⁄4 107.2 6 153 1.43 0.65
⁄ 20 31⁄8 79.8 57⁄16 137.7
3 4 611⁄16 169.9 15⁄16 32.8 27⁄16 61.2 33⁄4 96.0 4 101.1 413⁄16 122 47⁄16 112.3 413⁄16 122.4 61⁄2 165 1.52 0.69
1 25 39⁄16 90.4 63⁄16 157.2 714⁄16 199.9 13⁄8 34.5 23⁄4 70.6 415⁄16 110.2 49⁄16 116.1 55⁄16 135 51⁄8 130.0 59⁄16 141.7 71⁄16 179 2.22 1.01
11⁄4 32 45⁄16 110.2 615⁄16 176.0 913⁄16 248.9 19⁄16 39.40 31⁄4 81.8 55⁄8 142.7 53⁄8 136.9 – – 67⁄8 175.3 67⁄16 163.6 – – 3.61 1.64
11⁄2 40 51⁄2 140.2 113⁄4 297.9 163⁄4 426.0 17⁄8 47.50 49⁄16 115.8 613⁄16 142.7 611⁄16 169.9 – – 81⁄16 205.2 77⁄8 199.6 – – 9.27 4.20
2 50 51⁄2 140.2 113⁄4 297.9 163⁄4 426.0 17⁄8 47.50 49⁄16 115.8 613⁄16 173.5 615⁄16 176.5 – – 81⁄8 206.8 83⁄8 212.9 – – 9.59 4.35
A Watts Water Technologies Company USA: Tel: (978) 688-1811 • Fax: (978) 794-1848 • watts.com
Canada: Tel: (905) 332-4090 • Fax: (905) 332-7068 • watts.ca
Latin America: Tel: (52) 81-1001-8600 • watts.com
ES-LFX65B 1427 © 2014 Watts

ES-530C
For Residential, Commercial and Industrial Applications
ESI West Rock
Job Name ______________________________________________ Chil-Pak
Contractor ______________________________________________
Job Location ___________________________________________ Approval ________________________________________________
Engineer _______________________________________________ Contractor’s P.O. No. ____________________________________
Approval _______________________________________________ Representative __________________________________________
Series 530C 7
6
Calibrated Pressure Relief Valves
Features 5
• Calibrated adjustment feature for setting valve to relief 4
pressure required
• Adjustable range 50 - 175 psi (3.45 - 12.06 bars) 3
• All bronze construction
• All stainless steel springs 1
• Buna-N disc on machined body seat
Specifications No. Part Material
• Sizes 1⁄2" and 3⁄4" (15 & 20mm) 1 Body Bronze casting
• Inlet (bottom) male threaded, NPT 2 Bonnet F.C. brass
• Outlet (side), female threaded, NPT 3 Disc Holder F.C. brass
4 Disc Buna-N
Design 5 Adjustable Spring Stainless steel
• The Watts Series 530C are spring operated bronze relief 6 O-Ring Buna-N
valves designed to be used only as protection from the build 7 Spring Washer Sheet brass
up of excessive pressure in systems containing water, oil or air.
• The Watts Series 530C are not ASME approved safety Dimensions
relief valves and should not be used in system applica- Size (DN) Height Width Weight
tions with this requirement. Model in. mm in. mm in. mm lbs. gm.
• Incorporate a calibrated adjustment feature for 12
setting the valve to the relief pressure required. 530C ⁄ or 3⁄4 15 or 20 3 76 15⁄8 41 .63 286
Application Capacity (530C)

• Ideally suited for bypass thermal expansion pressure relief
psi bars
• Not an ASME approved safety relief valve 300 20.7
Temperature & Pressure 275 18.9
Maximum Pressure: 300 psi (20.67 bars) 250 17.2
225 15.5
Inlet Pressure
Maximum Temperature: 180°F (82°C) 12

⁄ ", 3⁄4"
200 13.8 (13,19mm)
Spring Ranges Available 175 12.1
12
⁄ ", 3⁄4"
Size 1⁄2" or 3⁄4": 50 - 175 psi (3.45 - 12.06 bars) 150 10.3
Size 3⁄4": 100 - 300 psi (6.89 - 20.67 bars) (13,19mm)
125 8.6
100 6.9
Watts product specifications in U.S. customary units and metric are ap-
75 5.2
proximate and are provided for reference only. Watts reserves the right to 50 3.4
change or modify product design, construction, specifications, or materi- 25 1.7
als without prior notice and without incurring any obligation to make
such changes and modifications on Watts products previously or subse- 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 gpm
quently sold. 19 38 57 76 95 114 133 152 lpm
X = Set Point Flow
Series 53 Dimensions
Size (DN) Height Width Weight
Pressure Relief Valve Model in. mm in. mm in. mm lbs. gm.
For pressure relief only, furnished without a test 12
lever. For test lever see Model 53L on back. Male 53 ⁄ or 3⁄4 15 or 20 27⁄8 73 13⁄4 44 .5 227
inlet sizes 1⁄2" and 3⁄4" have 1⁄2" female drain. Pres-
sure range 75-175 psi (5.17-12.06 bars). Standard
settings 75, 125, and 150 psi (5.17, 8.61 and
10.34 bars). Also, specially available at 50 psi
(3.45 bars) setting.
Model 3L
ASME Rated, Design Certified and Listed by C.S.A.
Used for protection against excessive pressure on domestic storage tanks or tankless water
heaters. Similar in construction to Watts Model 10L, the Model 3L has no temperature re-
lieving element. Pressure range 75-150 psi (5.17-10.34 bars). Standard setting 75, 100, 125
and 150 psi (5.17, 6.90, 8.61 and 10.34 bars). Size 3⁄4" x 3⁄4" (20mm x 20mm).
Popularly used in conjunction with the Model 210 gas shutoff valve on gas water heaters to
shut off gas to heater if water heater temperature exceeds 210°F (99°C).
Solar - For solar applications Model 3L, specify Z9 for stainless steel lever and pin for out-
side solar applications.
Model 3L - has ASME construction and is tested, listed and certified by the National Board
of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors.
ANSI Z21.22 “Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems.”
Model 53L DESIGN CERTIFIED and listed by C.S.A.
Same basic design as Model 3L except it is furnished in 1⁄2" (15mm) size and does not com-
ply with A.S.M.E. requirements. Model 3L
• Bronze body and stainless steel spring.
NOTE: On all the above pressure relief valves, pressure setting should be not less than 25-
30 psi above the maximum service main pressure.

Model in mm in mm in mm lb. gm. Version
3L 34⁄ 20 31⁄2 89 13⁄4 44 58⁄ 284 M7
53L 1 ⁄2 15 31⁄2 89 17⁄8 48 1 ⁄2 227 M7
*3⁄4" (20mm) size CSA and ASME
The Watts products shown below are small type relief valves. Construc-
tion of these products does not meet the (ANSI Z21.22) nationally.-
recognized applicable standard.
Series BP30 Model BP30
Diaphragm Operated Relief Valve Bypass Control Valves

Diaphragm actuated bypass relief valves to regulate liquid pressure as supplied by a positive pres-
sure pump. Protects equipment by opening at desired setting and allowing excess volume to be by-
passed back to source. Construction is bronze body. Sensitive rubber diaphragm and special Teflon
disc. Tee handle facilitates pressure change. Spring and adjustment handle free from contact with
liquid elements being controlled. Max. temperature 180°F (82°C).
Pressure Ranges:
BP30A - Pressure range 10-50 psi (.7-3.45 bars)
BP30B - Pressure range 45-100 psi (3.10-6.90 bars)
BP30C - Pressure range 75-175 psi (5.17-12.06 bars)
Size (DN) Height Length Weight
Model in mm in mm in mm lb. kg.
BP30 12 ⁄ 15 5 3 ⁄4 146 2 1 ⁄4 57 1 1 ⁄8 2.48
Model 5300A - Poppet type compact bypass relief valve. Size 1⁄ 2"
(15mm). Pressure range 0-250 psi (0-17.23 bars). Model 5300A
Series 30 12
⁄ " (15mm)
Well System Relief Valve
Model 30L-Z1 - Well system relief valve. Capacity: 20 gpm at 10 psi over pressure (85 psi)
Model 30L - with test lever; not diaphragm activated, for pressure relief service only. Nominal size: 1⁄2"
(15mm), NPT male inlet x female (drain) outlet. Standard pressure setting 75 psi (5.17 bars). Optional set-
tings 100, 125 and 150 psi (6.9, 8.6, 10.3 bars). These valves are not diaphragm actuated as needed for
certain applications like bypass control service. For adjustable non-lever diaphragm actuated relief or
control service, see BP30 Series.
Model N30 - Pressure range 5-25 psi (0.3-1.7 bars) and less lever.
Model N30L - Pressure range 30-50 psi (2.07-3.45 bars). Standard setting 30 or 45 psi (2.07 or 3.10 bars).

Model in mm in mm in mm lb. gm.
30L 12 ⁄ 15 4 1 ⁄2 114 2 1 ⁄4 57 78 ⁄ 397 Model 30L
USA: 815 Chestnut St., No. Andover, MA 01845-6098; www.wattsreg.com

Canada: 5435 North Service Rd., Burlington, ONT. L7L 5H7; www.wattscda.com
ES-530C 0050 © Watts Regulator Co., 1996 Printed in U.S.A.

LIQUID FILLED GAUGE ±3-2-3% Accuracy
2½” Dial - Brass Wetted Parts

The Miljoco Models PLF2598L and PLF2598 are rugged
& durable and suited for a wide variety of commercial
and general service applications. The stainless steel
case is filled with glycerine to protect the internals
against vibration and pulsation. This unit is completely
weather-proof and excellent for pumps, air compressors,
irrigation systems, and other installations suitable for
brass process connections. CAUTION: A coil syphon must
be installed on the connection when used on steam
applications.
General Specifications
CASE: Stainless steel.
RING: Crimped stainless steel.
LENS: Acrylic.
DIAL: Aluminum, white finished with black markings.
PLF2598L
POINTER: Aluminum, black, non-adjustable.
MOVEMENT: Brass with precision-milled teeth.
TUBE & SOCKET: Brass.
CONNECTION: See table below.
ACCURACY: ±3-2-3% (ASME B40.100 Grade B).
Standard Ranges
PROCESS TEMPERATURE: 0 to 140°F (-18 to 60°C). p si b ar
C ode R an g e
Fig. Div. Fig. Div.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: 0 to 140°F (-18 to 60°C).
001 30" Hg-0 & bar 5 1 0.2 0.02
002 30" Hg-0-15 psi & bar 5 0.5 0.5 0.05
Models 003
004
30" Hg-0-30 psi & bar
30" Hg-0-60 psi & bar
10
10
1
2
0.5 0.1
1 0.1
Model D ial Siz e Outlet C onn. 005 30" Hg-0-100 psi & bar 20 2 1 0.2
P L F 2598L 2½" Bottom 1/4" NPT 006 30" Hg-0-150 psi & bar 25 5 2 0.2
P L F 2598 2½" B a ck 1/4" NPT
008 30" Hg-0-300 psi & bar 50 10 20 0.5
Other case styl es m ay be avai l abl e - consul t factory.
02 0-15 psi & bar 2.5 0.5 0.2 0.02
03 0-30 psi & bar 5 1 0.5 0.05
Dimensions
04 0-60 psi & bar 10 2 1 0.1
(in.) 05 0-100 psi & bar 20 2 1 0.2
06 0-160 psi & bar 40 5 2 0.2
07 0-200 psi & bar 50 5 2 0.5
08 0-300 psi & bar 50 10 5 0.5
09 0-400 psi & bar 100 10 4 1
10 0-600 psi & bar 100 20 10 1
11 0-1000 psi & bar 200 20 10 2
19 0-1500 psi & bar 300 20 20 5
12 0-2000 psi & bar 500 50 20 5
13 0-3000 psi & bar 500 100 50 5
14 0-5000 psi & bar 1000 100 50 10
To Order
PLF2598L 04
Model Number Range Code
7
INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETER
Solar Digital
The solar-powered Miljoco CDX9 Series represents the
“next generation” in industrial thermometers. The bold, Bi-directional solar
hi-contrast display is easily read from greater distances panels collect light
from multiple
than the typical glass tube thermometer. The unique, surfaces for
patented* design includes bi-directional solar panels, assured response
allowing the unit to collect light from multiple planes
and providing reliable service in even the most dimly lit
installations.
The CDX9 Industrial Thermometer is furnished in one

standard temperature range (-58 to 302°F & -50 to 150°C)
which is switchable in the field. This wide range covers
most applications for this type of product, while offering
an environmentally-friendly alternative to the commonly
specified mercury-in-glass thermometer.
*Patent No. D488,396
CDX935
General Specifications
CASE: High impact ABS black plastic.
STEM: Aluminum, 3-1/2” or 6”. Models & Dimensions (in.)
CONNECTION: 1-1/4”-18 UNF brass coupling nut.
Model Stem Dimension (in.)
SENSOR: Glass passivated thermistor. Number Length
RANGE: -58 to 302°F (-50 to 150°C), A B C U
C D X 935 3½" 3.20 7.56 5.75 2.50
field-switchable between °F & °C.
DISPLAY: LCD, black character, 0.50” high C D X 960 6" 3.20 10.06 8.25 5.00
with gray background.
ILLUMINANCE: Bi-directional solar collectors, 35 lux.
UPDATE TIME: 10 seconds.
ACCURACY: Greater value of 1° or 1% of reading.
RESOLUTION: 0.10° from -58 to 199.9°F
(-50° to 93°C), 1.0° from 200 to 302°F (94° to 150°C).
RECALIBRATION: Internal potentiometer.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
Ambient Temperature: -20 to 140°F (-35 to 60°C).
Ambient Temperature Error: None.
Maximum Humidity: 100%.
Range
C ode R an g e
85 -58 to 302°F / -50 to 150°C
Options & Accessories To Order

 Air-Duct Stem
 Water-Proof Plastic Cover
CDX935 85
Model Number Range Code
39
TAB 7
CONTROLS & RELATED COMPONENTS / SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
a) Control Valves
b) Refrigerant Leak Detector
c) Refrigerant Sensor
d) ABB VFDs
e) Differential Pressure Sensor
f) Immersion Temperature Sensor
g) Flow Meter
h) Humidity Sensor
i) Controls Transformer
j) Pressure Gauges
k) Thermometers
l) Thermowells
m) Emergency Stop Switch
n) Current Switches
o) Touch Screen
p) Control Module
q) Points List
r) Control P&ID
s) Sequence of Operation
I/O Pro 812u
Stand-Alone Controller
T
The I/O Pro 812u is a general-use controller that you can easily
customize to meet any sequence of operation needs. Fully capable
of operating in a 100% stand-alone control mode, the I/O Pro 812u
can connect to a Building Automation System (BAS) using any of
today’s four leading protocols: BACnet (IP, Ethernet, ARC156, MS/
TP, and PTP), Modbus RTU, N2, and LonWorks. The point mapping
to all of these protocols can be pre-set, so that the protocol and
baud rates desired can be easily field-selected without the need
for any additional downloads or technician assistance. The I/O
Pro 812u provides ample input/output capacity on the base
controller, plus support for multiple expansion boards if additional
I/O capacity is needed.
Key Features and Benefits
• I/O point count: up to 140 I/O points using the I/O Pro Ex816u.
Also compatible with I/O Flex Ex8160 expander board
• Built-in dip switch-configurable protocol support for automation

systems: BACnet (IP, ARC156, MS/TP, and PTP modes), Modbus
RTU, N2, and LonWorks
• Remote access support over the Internet/Intranet or modem
• Custom-programmable using our powerful Eikon graphic

programming tool. Eikon allows you to create graphic control sequences for your application, which can be fully simulated off-line (with
Eikon’s simulation tool) and graphically viewable live on your equipment - the ultimate diagnostic tool
• Powerful, high-speed 32-bit Motorola Power PC microprocessor with 8MB Flash memory and 16MB of battery-backed SDRAM.
Firmware upgrades can be downloaded locally or remotely - no chip replacements necessary
• Built-in support through an Rnet port for OEMCtrl’s custom-configurable keypad/display units, for BACview5 (2 line by 16 character per
line display); for BACview6 (4-line by 40 character per line display); for intelligent sensors; and for local laptop access
Point Expanders - I/O Pro Ex48u and I/O Pro Ex816u
The Ex series of I/O expanders are designed for the powerful I/O Pro controller, and for
the most demanding control applications in the industry. The Ex I/O expanders can be
remote-mounted or directly mounted on the I/O Pro controllers
• High resolution Universal Inputs and Outputs for accuracy
• When used with the I/O Pro, allows for easy expansion of I/O using up to five Ex I/O
expanders in a stack panel configuration or remote-mounted up to 100 ft. away for
scalable solutions
• First Ex I/O expander that can be mounted directly on top of the I/O Pro controller,
reducing control panel space
• Removable screw connectors for easy wiring, termination, and service
•Tough construction delivers superior performance and reliability. Expanders are
constructed with a rugged aluminum cover which provides optimum electrical protection and noise immunity
• LED indicators of power, output, running, and error status, providing a quick overview of module status
Specifications Power
Physical
24 Vac ± 10%, 50-60 Hz, 50 VA power consumption (56 VA with BACview attached),
26 Vdc (25 V min, 30 V max), Single Class 2 source only, 100 VA or less
Rugged aluminum housing, removable screw terminals with custom silk

screening available
Operating Range -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C); 10 to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing
Universal Outputs 8 universal outputs that are jumper-configurable as 0-10 Vdc, or 0-20 mA dc
with 12-bit A/D or 24 Vdc @ 50 mA relay drive. HOA (hand/off/auto) switches
for all outputs, including potentiometer for manual adjustment of analog outputs.
Universal Inputs 12 configurable universal inputs with 14-bit A/D resolution. Supported input
types include: 0-5 Vdc, 0-10 Vdc, 0-20 mA, Thermistor (10k Ohm Type II), 1k Ohm
RTD (Platinum, Nickel, or Balco), and Dry Contact. All inputs support pulse
counting up to 40 cycles per second (25mSec minimum pulse).
Communication Ports Port 1: Configurable for ARC156 or EIA-485 (2-wire). Built-in support for BACnet
(MS/TP or ARC156), N2, and Modbus, allowing connection to auxillary devices
such as equipment-mounted VFD’s, burners, compressors, etc.. Proprietary
communication protocol support is also available
Port 2a: Configurable for EIA-232 or EIA-485 (2-wire or 4-wire). Network protocol
selectable for BACnet (MS/TP or PTP), Modbus, N2, LonWorks SLTA, or modem.
Rnet port: Interface with a BACview5, BACview6 , RS sensors, or local laptop.
Xnet Remote Expansion port: Connect up to five I/O Pro Ex816u or I/O Flex
Ex8160 point expanders via the Xnet network
Optional Card Port LonWorks Option Card for connection to Free Topology LON networks
(TP/FT-10 Channell)
Status Indication Visual (LED) status of power, running, and errors. LED indicators for transmit/
receive for Port 1 and Port 2 and for each of the 8 outputs
Battery Battery CR123A has a life of 10 years with 720 hours of cumulative power outage
Protection Surge and transient protection circuitry for power and communications
Listed by UL-916 (Canadian Std C22.2 No. 205-M1983), CE, FCC Part 15-Subpart B - Class A.
BTL (BACnet Test Labs) - BACnet Building Controller (B-BC) - BTL Listed Product
http://www.bacnetinternational.net/btl/index.php?m=47
1-
7-1/2”
1/
2”
11-5/16”
1025 Cobb Place Boulevard . Kennesaw, GA 30144 . (770) 429.3060 . Fax (770) 429.3061 . www.oemctrl.com
(2/11), ©2011, OEMCtrl and the OEMCtrl logo are trademarks of OEMCtrl. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
A member of the United Technologies Corporation family. Stock symbol UTX
Ex I/O Expanders
Point Expander
T
The Ex series of I/O expanders are designed for the powerful I/O Pro
controller, and for the most demanding control applications in the industry.
The Ex I/O expanders can be remote mounted or directly mounted on the
I/O Pro controllers.
Key Features and Benefits

• High resolution Universal Inputs and Outputs for accuracy.
• When used with the I/O Pro, allows for easy expansion of I/O using up to
five Ex I/O expansion modules in a stack panel configuration or remote
mounted up to 100 ft. away for scalable solutions.
• First Ex I/O expander that can be mounted directly on top of the I/O Pro
controller, reducing control panel space.
• Tough construction delivers superior performance and reliability. Modules

are constructed with a rugged aluminum cover which provides optimum
electrical protection and noise immunity.
• Removable screw connectors for easy wiring, termination, and service.
Product Universal Outputs Universal Inputs

Ex48u 4 8
Ex816u 8 16
Specifications Power
Physical
screening available.
24VAC ± 10% (21.6VAC to 26.4VAC), 50 to 60Hz, 45VA, or 26 Vdc ±10%, 21W
Rugged aluminum housing, removable screw terminals with custom silk
Operating Range -20° to 140°F (-29° to 60°C); 10 to 90% relative humidity, non-condensing
Universal Inputs Configurable universal inputs with 14 A/D resolution. Supported input types
include: 0-5 Vdc, 0-10 Vdc, 0-20 mA, Thermistor (10k Ohm Type II), 1k Ohm RTD
(Platinum, Nickel, or Balco), and Dry Contact. All inputs support pulse counting
up to 40 cycles per second (12.5mSec minimum pulse duration).
Universal Outputs Universal outputs that are jumper configurable as 0-10 Vdc, or 0-20 mAdc
with 12-bit D/A or 24 Vdc@50mA relay drive. HOA (hand/off/auto) switches for
all outputs, including potentiometer for manual adjustment of analog outputs.
Communication Xnet I/O Expander bus for 500 Kbps or 62.5 Kbps communications between I/O
Pro Controller and Ex I/O Expanders.
Expansion Five Ex I/O expansion modules can be connected - one mounted directly on top
of the controller, mounted locally in a stack configuration or remote mounted up
to 100 ft. away.
Status Indication Visual (LED) status of power, running, and errors. Xnet, TX and Xnet RX
Addressing Rotary dip switches for intuitive network addressing of expander modules
Protection Surge and transient protection circuitry for power and communications
Listed by UL916 (Canadian Std C22.2 No. 205-M1983), CE, FCC part 15 - Subpart B - class A
Dimensions 4-3/4” (width) by 9” (height) by 1-1/2” (recommended panel depth)

121mm (width) by 229mm (height) by 38mm (recommended panel depth)
Mounting Hole Dimensions 2-3/4” from left (width) by 8-1/2” (height)

70 mm width by 216mm height
Weight .83 lb. (.37 kg)
1025 Cobb Place Boulevard . Kennesaw, GA 30144 . (770) 429.3060 . Fax (770) 429.3061 . www.oemctrl.com
(2/11), ©2011, OEMCtrl and the OEMCtrl logo are trademarks of OEMCtrl. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
A member of the United Technologies Corporation family. Stock symbol UTX
Functions
 BACnet  Modbus L‑VIS Touch Panel
 CEA‑709 M‑Bus
KNX  OPC LVIS‑3ME7-Gx/3ME12-A1/3ME15-A1/3ME15‑Gx
Datasheet #89033420
L‑VIS Touch Panels for LonMark, BACnet, and Modbus networks are ideally suited
L‑WEB, L‑STUDIO
for visualization and operation of various applications in building automation.
L‑VIS Touch Panels visualize building systems, can be used as room operator pan‑
els, in hospital operation or isolation rooms, conference and reception areas. The
fully customizable user screens can show dynamic pages that are easy to navigate.
L‑VIS Touch Panels make use of an extremely low power embedded controller
platform and operating system. This makes L‑VIS resistant against problems when
re-booting after power outage and also against any viruses.
L‑ROC
L‑VIS impresses with its timeless design, harmonic integration into modern and
historical architecture, and with its extremely user friendly concept. The shallow
installation depth and low thermal power loss allow mounting in almost any
location.
Different Sizes
L‑INX
L‑VIS Touch Panels are available in the following variations:
LVIS‑3ME7-Gx 7” Touch Display 800 x 480 262 144 colors

Frameless glass front and capacitive touch
LVIS‑3ME12-A1 12.1” Touch Display 800 x 600 262 144 colors
Aluminum frame with anodized finish
L‑IOB
LVIS‑3ME15-A1 15” Touch Display 1024 x 768 262 144 colors
Alumnium frame with anodized finish
LVIS‑3ME15‑Gx 15” Touch Display 1024 x 768 262 144 colors
OPC Frameless glass front and capacitive touch
CEA‑709 BACnet Modbus XML‑DA
Gateways
IoT Integration
OPC UA WLAN LTE
The IoT function (Node.js) allows connecting the system to almost any cloud ser‑
vice, either for uploading historical data to analytics services, delivering alarm
IoT messages to alarm processing services or operating parts of the control system
L‑VIS, L-STAT
L‑VIS, L-STAT
over a cloud service (e.g., scheduling based on Web calendars or booking sys‑
tems). Processing Internet information such as weather data in forecast-based
SMS
control is also possible. Finally, the JavaScript kernel also allows implementing
serial protocols to non-standard equipment in primary plant control.
Dynamic Graphical Pages

VPN VNC RNI
The graphical pages may consist of multiple dynamic graphical controls that show
L‑DALI
L-INX Automation Server
y=f(x) the current plant status in real time. It is also possible to access decentralized
schedules, alarm servers, or trends. The graphical projects are designed with the
Made in Austria
LINK
PLC ACT CNIP
ACT
2 1 RNI serial
LOYTEC
power status
12-35 VDC INPUT or
FT
12-24 VAC, 40-70 Hz
RS-485
- +
www.loytec.com
DC
+- B A
100Base-T LINX-110
~ ~ AC
1 2 3 4 5 6 15 16 17
L‑VIS/‌L‑WEB configuration tool free of charge. Without any know-how in HTML or

Java, user specific graphical pages can be created. Dynamic information is shown
through value or text controls, changing symbols, bar charts, trend views, alarm
and event lists, or schedule controls. The L‑VIS/‌L‑WEB configuration tool allows for
Routers, NIC
using most of the pixel graphic formats (GIF, JPG, BMP, TIFF, PNG, MNG, ICO), vector
graphics (SVG) and alpha blending.
Playback of Audio Files and Streams

The L‑VIS Touch Panel supports the playback of stereo MP3, WAV, and MP3 streams
(for example webradio). The playback will be started or stopped by the respective
Interfaces
action object. The action object is linked to one of the available audio files or to
the URL of an MP3 stream. When accessing a playback via LWEB‑802 or LWEB‑803,
it will be executed locally on the client.
Automatic Page Generation

Pages including data point names and values, alarm views, schedules, or trends
Accessories
can be created automatically by the L‑VIS/L‑WEB configuration tool. This signifi‑

cantly reduces engineering time and cost.
buildings under control 105

Functions
L‑VIS Touch Panel
LVIS‑3ME7-Gx/3ME12-A1/3ME15-A1/3ME15‑Gx
Connectivity and Data Points
L‑WEB, L‑STUDIO
The L‑VIS Touch Panels support connectivity to LonMark Systems and BACnet net‑
works. In addition, the Touch Panels provide communication to Modbus either
as Master or Slave. For this purpose, Modbus TCP is supported exclusively and
Modbus RTU is available via the RS‑485 terminal.
22 L‑VIS Touch Panels communicate with LonMark Systems via IP‑852 (Ethernet/‌IP)
or TP/‌FT‑10 channels. The integrated remote network interface (Ethernet/‌IP) pro‑
L‑ROC
1 A Room 311 Mo 24.08.2015 10:44 vides remote access to the TP/‌FT‑10 channel for configuration, service and main‑
AC
tenance purposes.
23.2°c
AC
Heat Valve
21°/21°
100%
23° Auto
BACnet networks are connected via BACnet/‌IP or BACnet MS/‌TP. The L‑VIS Touch
Panels implement the BACnet Building Controller (B-BC) profile. They include a
fully featured built-in BACnet/‌IP to MS/‌TP router with BBMD (BACnet Broadcast
Management Device) and slave proxy functionality.
L‑INX
Math objects can calculate any kind of formula using data points available on the
device.
L‑VIS devices are equipped with two Ethernet ports. They can either be configured
to use the internal switch to interconnect the two ports or every port is configured
to work in a separate IP network.
L‑IOB
When the Ethernet ports are configured for two separate IP networks, one port
can be connected for instance to a WAN (Wide Area Network) with enabled net‑
work security (HTTPS) while the second port can be configured to be connected
to an insecure network (LAN) where the standard building automation protocols
like BACnet/‌IP, LON/‌IP, or Modbus TCP are used. These devices also feature firewall
Gateways
functionality to isolate particular protocols or services between the ports.

1 A Room 111 Mo 24.08.2015 10:44
Using the internal switch, a daisy chained line topology of up to 20 devices can be
built, which reduces costs for network installation. The IP switch also allows the
80% setup of a redundant Ethernet installation (ring topology), which increases reli‑
Helligkeit 1435 lux
ON
ability. The redundant Ethernet topology is enabled by the Rapid Spanning Tree
L‑VIS, L-STAT
OFF AUTO
L‑VIS, L-STAT
Protocol (RSTP), which is supported by most managed switches.

The L‑VIS devices provide fully featured AST™ functionality (Alarming, Scheduling,
and Trending) and can be integrated perfectly into the L‑WEB Building
Management System.
L‑DALI
Routers, NIC
Interfaces
Accessories
106 www.loytec.com
Functions
L‑VIS Touch Panel
L‑WEB, L‑STUDIO
Features
• High resolution TFT touch display with dimmable backlight • Compliant with CEA‑709, CEA‑852, and
• Anodized aluminum front frame (LVIS‑3ME12‑A1, ISO/‌IEC 14908 Standard (LonMark System)
LVIS‑3ME15‑A1) or frameless glass front and • Supports CEA‑709 TP/‌FT‑10 or IP‑852 (Ethernet/‌IP)
capacitive touch (LVIS‑3ME7‑Gx, LVIS‑3ME15-Gx) • Support of dynamically created network
• Flush-mounting in combination with the mounting frame variables or static network variables
• Stores customized graphical pages • Support of user-defined NVs (UNVTs) and
L‑ROC
• Visualization of customized graphical pages Configuration Properties (SCPTs, UCPTs)
through built-in touch panel, LWEB‑900 (building • Remote Network Interface (RNI) with 2 MNI devices
management), and LWEB‑802/‌803 • Compliant with ANSI/‌ASHRAE 135‑2012
• Device configuration and graphical page creation with and ISO 16484‑5:2012 standard
the L‑VIS/L‑WEB configuration tool free of charge • Supports BACnet MS/‌TP and BACnet/‌IP
• Supports all popular graphic file formats such
L‑INX
• BACnet Client Function (Write Property,
as GIF, JPG, BMP, TIFF, PNG, MNG, ICO Read Property, COV Subscription)
• Support of SVG vector graphics • BACnet Client Configuration with configuration
• Supports alpha blending tool (scan and EDE import)
• Supports popular font types such as • B-BC (BACnet Building Controller)
TrueType, Type-1, BDF, PCF, and OTF • Integrated BACnet/‌IP to BACnet MS/‌TP Router
L‑IOB
• Supports Unicode text and complex writing systems • BBMD (BACnet Broadcast Management Device)
• Built-in OPC UA and OPC XML‑DA server • Modbus TCP and Modbus RTU (Master or Slave)
• Built-in OPC XML‑DA client • Integrated web server for device configuration
• Dual Ethernet/‌IP interface and monitoring data points
Gateways
• Alarming, Scheduling, and Trending (AST™) • Access to network statistics
• Node.js support for easy IoT integration (e.g. Google • Configurable via Ethernet/‌IP or TP/FT‑10
calendar, Alexa & friends, multimedia equipment,…) • Playback of audio files and streams
• Event-driven e-mail notification • Supports WLAN through LWLAN‑800 Interface
• Math objects to execute mathematical • Supports LTE through LTE‑800 Interface
L‑VIS, L-STAT
L‑VIS, L-STAT
operations on data points
L‑DALI
Routers, NIC
Interfaces
Accessories

Functions
L‑VIS Touch Panel
L‑WEB, L‑STUDIO
Specifications
Type LVIS‑3ME7-Gx LVIS‑3ME12-A1 LVIS‑3ME15-xx
Screen size 7” (178 mm) 12.1” (307 mm) 15” (381 mm)
Dimensions (mm) 223.5 x 162 x 65 (L x W x H), DIM004 329 x 268.3 x 65 (L x W x H), DIM002 394 x 318 x 65 (L x W x H), DIM003
Dimensions cut-out (mm) 195 x 143 x 61 (L x W x H) 300 x 250 x 61 (L x W x H) 355 x 295 x 61 (L x W x H)
Display resolution 800 x 480, 262 144 colors 800 x 600, 262 144 colors 1024x 768, 262 144 colors
Interfaces 2 x Ethernet (100Base-T), Switch,
L‑ROC
OPC UA (server) and OPC XML‑DA (server, client),

LonMark IP‑852, BACnet/‌IP,
Modbus TCP (Master or Slave),
HTTP, FTP, SSH, HTTPS, SMTP, NTP, VNC
1  x  TP/‌FT‑10
1 x RS‑485 (ANSI TIA/‌EIA‑485):
L‑INX
BACnet  MS/‌TP
or
Modbus RTU (Master or Slave)
2 x Digital Input
2 x USB-A: (LVIS‑3ME15-Gx only 1 x USB-A)
WLAN (needs LWLAN‑800), LTE (needs LTE-800)
1 x USB-B (PC), speaker, audio output
L‑IOB
Remote Network Interface 1 RNI with 2 MNI devices

Power supply 24 V DC ±10 %, 2.5 W, 24 V DC ±10 %, 4 W, 24 V DC ±10 %, 4 W,
backlight on: 5 W backlight on: 10 W or backlight on: 10 W or
85-240 V AC, 7 W, 85-240 V AC, 7 W,
backlight on: 13 W backlight on: 13 W
Gateways
Operating conditions +10 °C to 40 °C, 10-90 % RH, noncondensing

Degree of protection Front: IP54 / back: IP10
Tools L‑VIS/‌L‑WEB Configurator
Resource limits
OPC data points 10 000 BACnet calendar objects 25
L‑VIS, L-STAT
L‑VIS, L-STAT
Modbus data points 2 000 BACnet scheduler objects 100 (64 data points per object)
VNC clients 16 BACnet notification classes 32
Network variables (NVs) 1 000 E‑mail templates 100
Alias NVs 1 000 Math objects 2 000
Address table entries 524 (non-ECS mode: 15) Alarm logs 100
LonMark Calendars 1 (25 calendar patterns) Trend logs 512 (4 000 000 entries, ≈ 60 MB)
L‑DALI
LonMark Schedulers 100 Total trended data points 512

LonMark Alarm Servers 1 Connections (Local/Global) 2 000/250
BACnet server objects 512 Number of L‑WEB clients 32 (simultaneously)
Order number Product description
Routers, NIC
LVIS‑3ME7-G1 CEA-709, BACnet, and Modbus Touch Panel 7”, frameless glass front and capacitive touch, silver
LVIS‑3ME7-G2 CEA-709, BACnet, and Modbus Touch Panel 7”, frameless glass front and capacitive touch, black
LVIS‑3ME12-A1 CEA‑709, BACnet, and Modbus Touch Panel 12.1”, aluminum frame with anodized finish
LVIS‑3ME15-A1 CEA‑709, BACnet, and Modbus Touch Panel 15”, aluminum frame with anodized finish
LVIS‑3ME15-G1 CEA-709, BACnet, and Modbus Touch Panel 15”, frameless glass front and capacitive touch, silver
Interfaces
LVIS‑3ME15-G2 CEA-709, BACnet, and Modbus Touch Panel 15”, frameless glass front and capacitive touch, black
LVIS‑3ME15-G3 CEA-709, BACnet, and Modbus Touch Panel 15”, frameless glass front and capacitive touch, white
LVIS‑FRAME7 Mounting frame for 7” Touch Panels
LVIS‑FRAME12 Mounting frame for 12.1” Touch Panels
Accessories
LVIS‑FRAME15 Mounting frame for 15” Touch Panels

LWLAN‑800 Wireless LAN Interface IEEE 802.11bgn
LTE‑800 USB LTE Interface
108 www.loytec.com
Functions
Dimensions of the devices in mm and [inch]

DIM001
L‑WEB, L‑STUDIO
L-TEMP2
[.984]
25
L‑ROC
35.5 [1.398]
6 [.236]
71 [2.795]
L‑INX
[2.362]
60
4 [.157]
L‑IOB
71 [2.795]
Gateways
SCALE 1 : 2
10 0 20 40 60 80 100 mm
DIM002 LVIS‑3ME12‑A1
L‑VIS, L-STAT
25 [.984]
[1.063]
27
30 [1.181]
L‑DALI
90 [3.543]
[.157]
4 61 [2.402] 299 [11.772]
12.1″ LOYTEC
Routers, NIC
www.loytec.com
[10.563]
[7.295]
[9.803]
[63]
185.3
268.3
≈ 1600
249
Interfaces
246 [9.685]
329 [12.928]
Accessories
SCALE 1 : 5
20 0 20 40 60 80 100 mm
172 www.loytec.com
Functions
Dimensions of the devices in mm and [inch]
DIM003
L‑WEB, L‑STUDIO
LVIS‑3ME15‑A1
LVIS‑3ME15‑Gx 25 [.984]
[1.063]
27
30 [1.181]
90 [3.543]
[.157]
4 61 [2.402] 353 [13.898]
L‑ROC
15″ LOYTEC
www.loytec.com
[8.986]
L‑INX
[11.563]
[12.520]
228.25
[63]
≈ 1600
293.7
318
L‑IOB
304.4 [11.984]
394 [15.512]
Gateways
SCALE 1 : 5
20 0 20 40 60 80 100 mm
DIM004 LVIS‑3ME7-Gx
L‑VIS, L-STAT
[.984]
25
[1.575]
40
75 [2.953]
L‑DALI
[.0.118]
3 61 [2.402] 194 [7.638]
Routers, NIC
7″ LOYTEC
www.loytec.com
[3.622]
[6.378]
[5.591]
162
92
[63]
142
Interfaces
≈ 1600
153.5 [6.043]
Accessories
223.5 [8.800]
SCALE 1 : 3
10 0 20 40 60 80 100 mm

• F-1200 DUAL TURBINE •
INSERTION FLOW METER
FREQUENCY OUTPUT
Made in the USA
DESCRIPTION CALIBRATION
ONICON insertion turbine flow meters are Every ONICON flow meter is wet calibrated in
suitable for measuring electrically conductive our flow laboratory against primary volumetric
water-based liquids. The F-1200 model provides standards that are directly traceable to N.I.S.T. A
a high-resolution frequency output for certificate of calibration accompanies every meter.
connection to an ONICON display or Btu meter.
FEATURES
APPLICATIONS
Unmatched Price vs. Performance - Custom
• Closed loop chilled water, hot water, condenser calibrated, highly accurate instrumentation
water & water/glycol/brine solutions for HVAC at very competitive prices.
• Process water & water mixtures
• Domestic water Excellent Long-term Reliability - Patented
electronic sensing is resistant to scale and
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS particulate matter. Low mass turbines with
engineered jewel bearing systems provide a
ACCURACY mechanical system that virtually does not
± 0.5% of reading at calibrated velocity wear.
± 1% of reading from 3 to 30 ft/s (10:1 range)
± 2% of reading from 0.4 to 20 ft/s (50:1 range) Industry Leading Two-year “No-fault” Warranty -
SENSING METHOD Reduces start-up costs with extended coverage
Electronic impedance sensing to include accidental installation damage
(non-magnetic and non-photoelectric) (miswiring, etc.) Certain exclusions apply. See
PIPE SIZE RANGE our complete warranty statement for details.
2½” through 72” nominal diameter
SUPPLY VOLTAGE Simplified Hot Tap Insertion Design -
Standard on every insertion flow meter.
24 ± 4 V AC/DC at 30 mA
Allows for insertion and removal by hand
LIQUID TEMPERATURE RANGE
without system shutdown.
Standard: 180° F continuous, 200° F peak
High Temp: 280° F continuous, 300° F peak
Meters operating above 250° F require 316 SS OPERATING RANGE FOR
construction option COMMON PIPE SIZES
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE 0.17 TO 20 ft/s
-5° to 160° F (-20° to 70° C) ±2% accuracy begins at 0.4 ft/s
OPERATING PRESSURE Pipe Size (Inches) Flow Rate (GPM)
400 PSI maximum 2½ 2.5 - 230
PRESSURE DROP 3 4 - 460
Less than 1 PSI at 20 ft/s in 2½” pipe, 4 8 - 800
decreasing in larger pipes and lower 6 15 - 1,800
velocities 8 26 - 3,100
OUTPUT SIGNALS PROVIDED 10 42 - 4,900
Frequency Output 12 60 - 7,050
14 72 - 8,600
0 – 15 V peak pulse, typically less than 3 00 Hz
16 98 - 11,400
18 120 - 14,600
(continued on back) 20 150 - 18,100
24 230 - 26,500
30 360 - 41,900
36 510 - 60,900
11451 Belcher Road South, Largo, FL 33773 • USA • Tel +1 (727) 447-6140 • Fax (727) 442-5699
0217-2 www.onicon.com • sales@onicon.com 05-14
F-1200 SPECIFICATIONS (cont.) F-1200 WIRING INFORMATION
MATERIAL
Wetted metal components: WIRE COLOR DESCRIPTION NOTES
Standard: Electroless nickel plated brass (+) 24 V AC/DC
RED Connect to power supply positive
Optional: 316 stainless steel supply voltage, 30 mA
ELECTRONICS ENCLOSURE (-) Common ground
BLACK Connect to power supply negative
Standard: Weathertight aluminum (Common with pipe ground)
enclosure (+) Frequency output signal: Signal for ONICON display or Btu
GREEN
Optional: Submersible enclosure 0-15 V peak pulse meter
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS DIAGNOSTIC SIGNALS
3-wire for frequency output
ORANGE Bottom turbine frequency These signals are for diagnostic
Standard: 10’ of cable with ½” NPT
purposes - connect to local display
conduit connection WHITE Top turbine frequency or Btu meter
Optional: Indoor DIN connector with
10’ of plenum rated cable
F-1200 WIRING DIAGRAM
ALSO AVAILABLE ONICON Display or

Btu Meter
RED • • + 24 V
GREEN • • FREQUENCY INPUT
BLACK • • GROUND
WHITE • • TOP TURBINE
10 3/4”
ORANGE • • BOTTOM TURBINE
SCROLL RESET PROGRAM
NOTE:
1. Black wire is common with the pipe ground (typically earth ground).
6”
Display Modules Btu Measurement
Systems
TYPICAL METER INSTALLATION THIS AREA ACCEPTABLE

Typical Meter
(New construction Installation
or scheduled shutdown) • Acceptable to install in vertical pipe
(New construction or scheduled shutdown)
• Position meter anywhere in upper 240°
for horizontal pipe
Horizontal Run Pipe
Optional output
To control
signal(s) to
system
control system ONICON
Display or
BTU Meter
(Optional)
CLEARANCE
REQUIRED
FOR INSTALLATION
Connect factory wires Typically
to field wires in appropriate Detail of hot tap adapter 30" - 36"
junction box. with turbine assembly depending on
½" FNPT pipe size and
withdrawn
conduit connection height of valve
assembly.
Insertion depth
gage provided Standard Installation
NOTE: with each meter Kit for Steel Pipe
Installation kits vary based on 1" Full port ball valve
pipe material and application. 1" Close nipple 1¼" for
For installations in pressurized hot tap
1" Branch outlet
(live) systems, use “hot tap” 1¼”
installation kit and drill hole using
a 1” wet tap drill. Minimum Hole Size = 1" FLOW
Must be centered
11451 Belcher Road South, Largo, FL 33773 • USA • Tel +1 (727) 447-6140 • Fax (727) 442-5699
0217-2 www.onicon.com • sales@onicon.com 05-14
063_Layout 1 7/8/14 9:58 AM Page 63
Series
Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter
PRESSURE
629
0.5% Accuracy, NEMA 4X (IP66) Enclosure

43/64 [17.07] 1-11/32
[34.13]
3-9/32
Differential Pressure Transmitters

[83.34]
OPTIONAL LIQUID TIGHT FITTING
CORD DIAMETER RANGE:
.200 TO .350 [5.06 TO 8.89]
1/4 NPT
1-5/8
[41.28]
5-25/32 [146.84]
1/4 NPT FEMALE FITTING
6-59/64 [175.82]
OPTIONAL 1/4 NPT MALE FITTING
The Series 629 Differential Pressure Transmitter monitors differential pressure of SPECIFICATIONS
air and compatible gases and liquids with 0.5% accuracy. The design employs dual pressure Service: Compatible gases & liquids.
sensors converting pressure changes into a standard 4 to 20 mA output signal for two wire Wetted Materials: Without valve: 316, 316L SS. Additional wetted parts with 3-
circuits. Small internal volume and minimum moving parts result in exceptional response way valve option: Buna-N, silicone grease, PTFE, brass 360, copper, reinforced
and reliability. Terminal block, zero and span adjustments are easily accessed under the acetal copolymer.
top cover. The Series 629 Differential Pressure Transmitter is designed to meet NEMA Accuracy: ±0.5% FS (includes linearity, hysteresis & repeatability).
4X (IP66) construction. Temperature Limits: 0 to 200°F (-18 to 93°C).
Compensated Temperature Limits: 0 to 175°F (-18 to 79°C).
APPLICATIONS Pressure Limits: See chart.
Monitor differential pressures across: Thermal Effect: 0.02%/°F (0.036%/°C) includes zero & span.
• Flow elements Power Requirements: 13 to 30 VDC (2-wire).
• Heat exchangers Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA. Optional 0 to 5, 0 to 10 VDC.
• Filters Response Time: 50 ms.
• Pumps Loop Resistance: 0 to 1300 Ω maximum for current output. For voltage outputs,
• Coils minimum load resistance: 2000 Ω.
• Chiller Electrical Connections: Terminal block; 1/2˝ female NPT conduit.
Process Connections: 1/4˝ female NPT.
Enclosure Rating: Designed to meet NEMA 4X (IP66).
Mounting Orientation: Not position sensitive.
Weight: 10.1 oz (286 g).
Standard Agency Approvals: CE.
Pressure Limits
Range Working* Over
Model (psid) Pressure (psi) Pressure (psi)
OPTIONS
629-02-CH-P2-E5-S1 10 20 100
-LED, 4.5 Digit LED Display
629-03-CH-P2-E5-S1 25 50 250
-NIST, NIST traceable calibration certificate
629-04-CH-P2-E5-S1 50 100 250
629-05-CH-P2-E5-S1 100 200 500
*Pressures exceeding the working pressure limit may cause a ACCESSORIES
calibration shift of up to ±3% of full scale. A-131A, 3-way brass manifold valve
641-LED, Field-upgradeable LED
A-155, Cable gland with 1/2˝ NPT male
BBV-1B, Mini SS 3-valve block manifold
3-Way Valve Manifold Assembly
A-228, 12˝ SS flex hose
Pressure Limits
Working*
Range Pressure Over
Model (psid) (psi) Pressure (psi)
629-02-CH-P2-E5-S1-3V 10 20 100
629-03-CH-P2-E5-S1-3V 25 50 100
629-04-CH-P2-E5-S1-3V 50 100 100
629-05-CH-P2-E5-S1-3V 100 100 100
3-way valve assembly with 629 shown with optional Red LED
integral bleed screws and cable gland.
CONTACT US | U.S. 219/879-8000 | U.K. (+44) (0)1494-461707 | A.U. (+61) (0) 2 4272 2055 | China +852-23181007 63
Automation Components, Inc.
HUMIDITY | THERMISTORS | RH OUTSIDE AIR
EH
RH OUTSIDE AIR
Relative Humidity, Outside Air, Thermistors
The ACI Relative Humidity with Thermistor Outside Air Series utilizes a thermoset polymer
capacitive sensing element with factory applied hygroscopic filter to deliver a proportional
analog current or voltage output signal. The hygroscopic filter provides added resistance to
4X moisture, dust, and other chemicals for greater long term reliability. The RH Outside Air
transmitter features integral DIP switches for field selection of the proper output signal and
supply voltage to meet your applications requirements. Each unit also contains 0%, 50%, and
100% test options to verify that the transmitter is both working and wired properly. Field
calibration also can be performed by using the increment and decrement calibration DIP
switches without the need to replace the sensing element. These enhancements provide
increased flexibility and outstanding long-term reliability. Outside Air configurations feature a
weatherproof Euro style enclosure with gasketed cover and conformally coated circuit boards for added moisture and chemical resistance. Three
and Five-point NIST Calibration Certificates are available upon request but they must be ordered separately.
Applications: Monitor Outdoor Air Humidity, Economizer Control, Psychrometric calculations such as Enthalpy and Dew point, Wash down Applications
The ACI RH Thermistor Outside Air is covered by ACI's Five (5) Year Limited Warranty. The warranty can be found in the front of ACI's
Sensors & Transmitters catalog, as well as on ACI's website, www.workaci.com.
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
RH Supply Voltage 4-20 mA: 250 Ohm Load: 15 - 40 VDC / 18 - 28 VAC | 500 Ohm Load: 18 - 40 VDC / 18 - 28 VAC
(Reverse Polarity Protected): 0-5 VDC: 12 - 40 VDC / 18 - 28 VAC | 0-10 VDC: 18 - 40 VDC / 18 - 28 VAC
RH Supply Current (VA): Voltage Output: 8 mA maximum (0.32 VA) | Current Output: 24 mA maximum (0.83 VA)
RH Output Load Resistance: 4-20 mA: 700 Ohms maximum | 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC: 4K Ohms Minimum
RH Output Signal: 2-wire: 4 - 20 mA (Factory Default) | 3-wire: 0-5 or 0-10 VDC and 4 - 20 mA (Field Selectable)
RH Accuracy @ 77°F (25°C): +/- 1% over 20% RH Range between 20 to 90% | +/- 2%, 3%, or 5% from 10 to 95%
RH Measurement Range 0-100%
Operating RH Range: 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing (Conformally Coated PCB’s)
Operating Temperature Range: -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C)
Storage Temperature Range: -40 to 149°F (-40 to 65°C)
RH Stability | Repeatability | Sensitivity: Less than 2% drift / 5 years | 0.5% RH | 0.1% RH
RH Response Time (T63): 20 Seconds Typical
RH Sensor Type: Capacitive with Hydrophobic Filter
RH Transmitter Stabilization Time: 30 Minutes (Recommended time before doing accuracy verification)
RH Connections | Wire Size: Screw Terminal Blocks (Polarity Sensitive) | 16 (1.31 mm²) to 26 AWG (0.129 mm²)
RH Terminal Block Torque Rating: 4.43 to 5.31 lb-in (0.5 to 0.6 Nm)
RH NIST Test Points: Default Test Points: 3 Points (20%, 50% & 80%) or 5 Points (20%, 35%, 50%, 65% & 80%)
1% NIST Test Points: 5 Points within selected 20% Range (ie. 30%-50% are 30, 35, 40, 45 & 50)
Nominal Thermistor Resistive Output @ 77°F (25°C) RHx-1.8K Series: 1.8KΩ (Red/Yellow) RHx-CSI Series: 10KΩ (Green/Yellow)
(Lead Wire Colors): RHx-3K Series: 3KΩ (White/Brown) RHx-10KS Series: 10KΩ (White/Blue)
RHx-AN Series (Type III): 10KΩ (White/White) RHx-10K-E1 Series: 10KΩ (Gray/Orange)
RHx-AN-BC Series: 5.238KΩ (White/Yellow) RHx-20K Series: 20KΩ (Brown/Blue)
RHx-CP Series (Type II): 10KΩ (White/Green) RHx-100KS Series: 100KΩ (Black/Yellow)
Thermistor Accuracy 32-158°F (0-70°C): +/- 0.36°F (0.2°C) except 10K-E1 Series: +/- 0.54°F (0.3°C)
1.8K Series: +/- 0.9°F (0.5°C) @ 77°F (25°C) & +/- 1.8°F (1.0°C) from 32 to 158°F (0 to 70°C)
Thermistor Power Dissipation Constant: 3 mW/°C except 1.8K Series: 1 mW/°C; 10K-E1 Series: 2 mW/°C
Thermistor Sensor Response Time (T63): 10 Seconds nominal
Lead Wire Length | Conductor Size: 14” (35.6 cm) | 22 AWG (0.65 mm)
Insulation | Rating: Etched Teflon (PTFE) Colored Leads | Mil Spec 16878/4 Type E
Enclosure Specifications (Material, Flammability, “-EH” Enclosure: ABS Plastic; UL94-V0; -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C)
Temperature, NEMA/IP Rating): “-4X” Enclosure: Polystyrene Plastic; UL94-V2; -40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C); NEMA 4X (IP 66)
Sensing Tube Dimensions (Length x Diameter): “-EH” Models: 3.00” (76.20 mm) x 1.125” (28.75 mm)
“-4X” Models: 4.73” (120.14 mm) x 0.845” (21.46mm)
Product Dimensions (L x W x D): See drawings on back of data sheet
Product Weight: A/RHx-xx-O Series: 0.59 lbs. (0.27 kg) | A/RHx-xx-O-4X Series: 0.45 lbs. (0.204 kg)
Agency Approvals: CE, RoHS2, WEEE
Call: 1-888-967-5224 | Web: www.workaci.com HUMIDITY | ##

Automation Components, Inc.
HUMIDITY | THERMISTORS | RH OUTSIDE AIR
DIMENSIONAL DRAWING
Euro Enclosure [EH]
2.12”
(53.72mm)
4.30”
(109.22mm) 6.52” (165.67mm)
NEMA 4X Enclosure [4X]
2.55”
(64.77mm) 3.70” (93.98mm) 4.73” (120.14mm)
2.23”
(56.71mm)
Front View Right View Top View
CUSTOM ORDERING Model # Example: A/

A.
RH2
B.
CP
C.
O
D. E.
NIST
F. MODEL #
A. Sensor Series No Selection Required A/ A/
B. Accuracy Select One (1) RH1 = +/-1% (Specify a 20% Range between 20 to 90% RH)
RH2 = +/-2% | RH3 = +/-3% | RH5 = +/-5%
C. Temperature Sensor Select One (1) 1.8K | 3K | 10KS | AN (Type III) | AN-BC | CP (Type II) | CSI | 10K-E1 | 20K | 100KS
D. Configuration Select One (1) O = Outside Air (Euro Enclosure) | O-4X = Outside Air (NEMA 4X Enclosure)
E. Output Signal Select One (1) ---- = 4 to 20 mA (Default) | 0 to 10 VDC (Field Selectable) | 0 to 5 VDC (Field Selectable)
F. NIST (Temperature) Select One (1) ---- = No NIST Certificate | NIST = NIST Certificate (Must Specify 1, 3 or 5 Points)
Note: Outputs are field selectable between 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC & 0-10 VDC
ACCESSORIES ORDERING [NIST] Model # Example: NIST RH CERT
Model # Description
NIST RH CERT RH Calibration Certificate (Specify 3 Point or 5 Point NIST)
Note: When ordering NIST certificates, please add an additional line item under the corresponding A/RHx-XX-O Model Number
HUMIDITY | ## Call: 1-888-967-5224 | Web: www.workaci.com

Automation Components, Inc. TEMPERATURE THERMISTORS
Duct w/o Box Probe Only Pipe Mount
Featured Thermistor Product
Duct Immersion w/o Well Copper Averaging Flexible Averaging
Strap Outdoor Air Raw Potted Sensor Raw, 6’ Leads Bullet Probe
Bullet Probe, 20’ Z Rigid Averaging
THERMISTORS
General Mounting
ACI offers a comprehensive selection of general mounting configurations for Thermistors (see list above).
These sensors provide a predictable and accurate output over the specified temperature range. Each
sensor configuration is designed and manufactured for long-term quality and performance. ACI
incorporates standard features such as double encapsulation and etched Teflon leads where applicable.
The ACI Thermistor Series is covered by ACI’s Five (5) year limited warranty, which is located in the front
of ACI’s Sensors & Transmitters catalog or can be found on ACI’s web site, which is www.workaci.com.
Automation Components, Inc. Made in the USA

11
TEMPERATURE THERMISTORS Automation Components, Inc.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy (0-70oC) Single Point: +/-0.2oC (+/-0.36oF) Sensor Output [A/10KS] 10KΩ @77°F (25°C)
Stability +/-0.13oC (+/-0.23oF) Sensor Output [A/2252] 2252Ω @77°F (25°C)
Interchangeability +/-0.2oC (+/-0.36oF) Sensor Output [A/CSI] 10KΩ @77°F (25°C)
Operating Temperature Range -40 to 302oF (-40 to 150oC) Sensor Output [A/AN-BC] 10KΩ with 11K Shunt
Sensor Output [A/AN] 10KΩ @ 77°F (Type III) Sensor Output [A/10K-E] 10KΩ @77°F (25°C)
Sensor Output [A/CP] 10KΩ @ 77°F (Type II) Sensor Output [A/10K-E1] 10KΩ @77°F (25°C)
Sensor Output [A/3K] 3KΩ @77°F (25°C) Power Dissipation Constant 3 mW/oC
Sensor Output [A/1.8K] 1.8KΩ @77°F (25°C) Operating Humidity 10 to 95% RH non-condensing
Sensor Output [A/20K] 20KΩ @77°F (25°C) Product Dimensions Please reference pages 5, 6, 7 & 8
Sensor Output [A/100KS] 100KΩ @77°F (25°C)
ORDERING
Select one Series (A), one Configuration (B), one Length (C), one Enclosure (D) & one Lead Wire (E) (optional). NOTE: See Thermowell data sheet
for proper well selection for all Immersion related sensors. Enclosure options (D) include Plastic Box (PB), Galvanized Box (GD), NEMA 3R (BB),
NEMA 4X (4X), & Euro Housing (EH). The Plastic Box (PB) is rated from 0 to 203oF. Stay within the same row throughout the selection process for all
General Mounting pages.
Sensor Series
A/AN A/3K A/20K A/10KS A/CSI A/10K-E

A/CP A/1.8K A/100KS A/2252 A/AN-BC A/10K-E1
BUILD PART NUMBER

After completing (A), (B), (C), (D) & (E) from the above table, fill in the “Part Number Table” below. An example part number is offered.
EXAMPLE: A/CP - D - 4” - PB
The ACI Mars Plastic Duct housing (PB) has been tested to and complies with the requirements specified in the UL 2043 Standard for Fire Test for heat and visible smoke release for
discrete products and their accessories installed in air-handling spaces. The Plastic Box has a UL94-HB rating. The NEMA 4X enclosure has a UL94-V2 flammability rating. The Euro
Housing enclosure has a UL94-V0 flammability rating. CE exception: Averaging units and any other configuration with leads longer than 3 meters.
12 1-888-967-5224 www.workaci.com
GENESIS INTERNATIONAL, INC.
SHERLOCK 802
REFRIGERANT GAS LEAK MONITORING AND ALARMING SYSTEM
The SHERLOCK 802 (SHER802) Monitoring System was
designed to monitor up to eight SHERLOCK Refrigerant
Gas Sensors, activating up to two alarms based upon
user defined alarm level setpoints. The SHERLOCK 802
is compliant with ASHRAE 15-2007 and Mechanical Code
requirements for refrigerant gas monitoring.
NEMA 1 Compliant Enclosure - This enclosure is
intended for indoor use only primarily to provide a degree
of protection against contact with the enclosed equipment.
The enclosure is not designed to provide protection from
water or to be placed in a hazardous environment. Mount
only in Pollution Level 2 environments, ie. environmentally
controlled offices, control rooms, or environmentally con-
trolled machine rooms.
Power Input 120/208/240vac, 50/60 Hz, 2.5 Amp
Inputs Up to 8 Sherlock Sensors: Cmos, Ir
or
Up to seven Sherlock Sensors and
One Oxygen Deprivation Sensor
Outputs Six (6) SPDT, 250VAC / 30V DC,
5.0 amp relays, Two (2) relays for
Level 1, Level 2 & System. Optional
Nema/IP Size Electrical Pollution 8 zone isolation alarm relays
Model # Rating Inches (mm) Category Protection
SHER802 1 12 x 9.5 x 5 II 2 Setback 24 Hour Time Clock
(305 x 241 x 127) Two Dry Contact Digital Inputs
Alarms Two Alarm Levels, One Fault Level,
Two SPDT Relay per Level, Fuse
On Common Terminal. One relay on
each alarm level can be silenceable
SENSOR ALARM STATUS
SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR
A B C D E F G H when in alarm. Zone isolation alarm
ALARM ACTIVE WHEN LIT
relays can activate at either level.
Breathing Operating Environment
Apparatus Temperature 35°F To 120°F (2°C To 50°C)
REFRIGERANT GAS
MONITORING SYSTEM Humidity 0 To 95% RH Non-condensing
PRESS TO
EXIT SILENCE
ACTIVE
ALARM ALARM
SILENCED
WHEN LIT
Display 2 Line By 20 Characters
SELECT
CHANGE
Alphanumeric Backlighted LCD
display
Self Contained - 30 Minutes
Keypad 5 Tactile Pushbuttons
Scroll Up, Scroll Down, Alarm Silent/
Clear, Select/Edit/Change, Exit
Breathing Function-Menu
Apparatus Alarm Indicators
Display Name And Current Reading Of
Alarming Sensor
Buzzer Built-in Piezo-electric, 90db @10ft,
SHERLOCK TM SHERLOCK TM
INFRARED
SENSOR for REFRIGERANT GAS
INFRARED
SENSOR for REFRIGERANT GAS
Silenceable
GENESIS INTERNATIONAL INC.
1040 Fox Chase Industrial Dr. Arnold, MO. 63010
GENESIS INTERNATIONAL INC.
1040 Fox Chase Industrial Dr. Arnold, MO. 63010
Optional Strobe Light, Factory Mounted on
Self Contained - 30 Minutes
SENSOR A SENSOR A
Top of Unit
Listings ETL, Conforms to UL Std. 3111-1
TYPICAL MACHINE ROOM INSTALLATION CAN/CSA C22.2 Std. No. 1010.1
99-0001 SHER802 05-02-14
Alarm Level Settings - The SHERLOCK 802 allows you to Alarm Relay Contacts - The SHERLOCK 802 provides two
set a unique Level 1 and Level 2 Alarm Setpoint for up to 8 fused SPDT (Single Pole Double Throw) relay outputs for each
sensors. When an Alarm Setpoint is exceeded, alarm relays for two alarm levels and a system alarm that switch positions
activate. Each alarm setpoint has a programmable Delay of 0 to in the event of an alarm condition. Level 1 alarm activates the
120 minutes. Sensor readings are required to exceed an Alarm K1A and K1B relays. Level 2 alarm activates the K2A and
Setpoint for the programmed amount of time before the control K2B relays. System alarm activates the 3A and 3B relays.
activates the corresponding alarm relay contacts. Level 2 for each individual sensor can be disabled. Relays
Alarm Indication - Alarms are logged to indicate which sensor K1B, K2B and 3B can be silenced (returned to non-alarm state)
went in and out of alarm and when. The alarm log stores the last when the SILENT button on the front panel is pushed. The
32 alarms. When a sensor is in alarm, an LED for this sensor other alarm relays will remain active until the alarm condition
on the front panel will light, the on-board beeper will sound and is cleared. The control can be programmed so the alarm is
the display will show the activated alarm level. cleared automatically when the sensor goes below the alarm
setpoint (UNLATCHED) or stay on until the alarm is manually
Systems Sensor Open Monitoring - The SHERLOCK 802 con- reset (LATCHED). The K1/K2 alarm level can be config-
stantly monitors the wiring to the sensors. If any sensor loses ured so the relays are "Energized to Alarm" or "De-Energized
communication for any reason, “OPEN” will appear on the dis- to Alarm", Common-Normally Open (C-NO) or Common-
play, the alams will activate and the condition logged. Normally Closed (C-NC).
Setback Alarm Settings - In some instances the control may
be expected to function in two different environments. The Optional Zone Isolation Alarm Relays (SHER802-R, Factory
SHERLOCK 802 provides a feature called SETBACK to Installed Option) - Optional zone isolation alarm relays (ZA
accommodate alternate alarm conditions. SETBACK provides - Sensor A Zone, ZB - Sensor B Zone, ZC - Sensor C Zone,
a secondary Alarm Setppoint and Delay. The control changes to ZD - Sensor D Zone, ZE - Sensor E Zone, ZF - Sensor F Zone,
the setback parameters when a dry contact closes (i.e. air flow ZG - Sensor G Zone, ZH - Sensor H Zone). Each relay can be
switch, sail switch or timer switch) or on a daily schedule. programmed to activate by level 1 or level 1 & 2 alarm.
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM (EXAMPLE)

6+(5 +27 1(875$/
*1'
9 9 615$ 9'& 9'&
,1
6(1625$ *1' ,1 5/<.% +2516752%(
+&)&6(1625
$/$50/(9(/
5/<.$ 5/<
6(16256
%7+58*
$/$50/(9(/ (;+$867)$1&217$&725
*1'
9 9 615+ 5/<
,1
6(1625+ *1' ,1
+&)&6(1625 '$03(502725&217$&725
$
6(7%$&. % 5/<.% +2516752%(
6(7%$&. $ $/$50/(9(/
%
&200 5/<=$ +2516752%(

5(027( '212786()25+251
%8==(5 6752%( =21(,62/$7,21
=21(,62/$7,21
%(/'(1$:*7:,67('675$1'(' 5(/$<6=%72=*
%(/'(1$:*6+,(/'('7:,67('
)25581629(5)((7
5/<=+ +2516752%(
6+(5/2&.,1387:,5,1*6&+(0$7,& =21(,62/$7,21
3
(06',*,7$/,1387

5/<.$
$/$50/(9(/
GENESIS INTERNATIONAL, INC.

1040 Fox Chase Industrial Dr Tel: 636-282-0011
Arnold, MO 63010 Fax:636-282-2722
Email: mail@genesis-international.com Web:www.genesis-international.com
B225 Technical Data Sheet
Stainless Steel Ball and Stem
Application
This valve is typically used in air handling units on heating or cooling coils, and
fan coil unit heating or cooling coils. Some other common applications include
Unit Ventilators, VAV box re-heat coils and bypass loops. This valve is suitable
for use in a hydronic system with variable flow.
Suitable Actuators
Non-Spring Spring
B225 LRB(X), NR LF
Dimensions (Inches [mm])
D C
Technical Data 2080 H1 H2

Fluid chilled, hot water, up to 60% glycol
Flow characteristic equal percentage
Controllable flow range 75° E F B
Valve Size [mm] 1” [25] A
Pipe connection NPT female ends
Housing Nickel-plated brass body LRB, LRX
Ball stainless steel
Stem stainless steel A B C D E F H1 H2
9.4” 3.1” 7.2” 6.3” 1.3” [33] 1.2” 0.9” [23]
Stem seal EPDM (lubricated)
[239] [78] [184] [161] [30]
Seat PTFE
O-ring EPDM (lubricated)
Characterized disc No Disc (full flow)
Safety Notes
Body Pressure Rating 600 psi
Date created, 12/03/2019 - Subject to change. © Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.
WARNING: This product can expose you to lead which is known to the State
Close-off pressure ∆ps 200 psi of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. For more information go
Cv 30 to www.p65warnings.ca.gov
Weight 1.1 lb [0.50 kg]
Fluid Temp Range (water) 0...250°F [-18...120°C]
Leakage rate 0% for A – AB
Servicing maintenance-free
Flow/Mounting Details
800-543-9038 USA 866-805-7089 CANADA 203-791-8396 LATIN AMERICA / CARIBBEAN

B225 Technical Data Sheet
Stainless Steel Ball and Stem
D
C
E F B
A
LF
A B C D E F
8.1” [206] 3.1” [78] 6.5” [165] 5.6” [142] 1.8” [46]
D C
E F B
A

ARB N4, ARX N4, NRB N4, NRX N4
A B C D E F
11.4” [289] 3.1” [78] 7.8” [199] 7.1” [181] 3.1” [80]

LF24 US, Valve Actuator Technical Data Sheet
On/Off, Spring Return, AC/DC 24 V
Technical Data 2199

Power Supply 24 VAC, ±20%, 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC, ±10%
Power consumption in operation 5W
Power consumption in rest 2.5 W
position
Transformer sizing 7 VA (class 2 power source)
Electrical Connection 18 GA appliance cable, 3 ft [1 m], with 1/2”
conduit connector
Overload Protection electronic throughout 0...95° rotation
Angle of rotation 90°
Direction of motion motor selectable with switch 0/1
Direction of motion fail-safe reversible with cw/ccw mounting
Position indication Mechanical
Running Time (Motor) 75 s
Running time fail-safe <25 s @ -4...122°F [-20...50°C], <60 s @
-22°F [-30°C]
Ambient humidity max. 95% r.H., non-condensing
Ambient temperature -22...122°F [-30...50°C]
Storage temperature -40...176°F [-40...80°C]
Degree of Protection IP54, NEMA 2

Agency Listing cULus acc. To UL 873 and CAN/CSA C22.2
No. 24-93
Noise level, motor 50 dB(A)
Noise level, fail-safe 62 dB(A)
Servicing maintenance-free
Quality Standard ISO 9001
Weight 3.1 lbs (1.40 kg.)
†Rated Impulse Voltage 800V, Type of action 1.AA, Control Pollution Degree 3

LF24 US, Valve Actuator Technical Data Sheet
On/Off, Spring Return, AC/DC 24 V
Wiring Diagrams
INSTALLATION NOTES 24 VAC Transformer A
1 3 11
A Actuators with appliance cables are numbered.
Line Blk (1) Common
Provide overload protection and disconnect as required. Volts Wht (2) + Hot
Actuators may also be powered by 24 VDC.
On/Off
Actuators may be connected in parallel if not mechanically linked. Power
consumption and input impedance must be observed.
Meets cULus requirements without the need of an electrical ground
connection.
! WARNING! LIVE ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS!

During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this
product, it may be necessary to work with live electrical components.
Have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been
properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these
tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to
live electrical components could result in death or serious injury.

F6250HDU, 2-Way Butterfly Valve
Resilient Seat, 304 Stainless Steel Disc
Product Features
50 psi bubble tight shut-off, Long stem design allows for 2” insulation, Valve
face-to-face dimensions comply with API 609 & MSS-SP-67, Completely
assembled and tested, ready for installation.
Application
These valves are designed to meet the needs of HVAC and commercial
applications requiring 0% leakage for liquids. Typical applications include chiller
isolation, cooling tower isolation, change-over systems, large air handler coil
control, bypass and process control applications. The large Cv values provide
for an economical control valve solution for larger flow applications. Designed
for use in ANSI flanged piping systems.
Jobsite Note
Valves should be stored in a weather protected area prior to construction.
Complete installation recommendations can be found in Belimo’s Installation
and Maintenance Instructions for F6/F7… Butterfly Valves.
Flow/Cv
Cv 10° Cv 20° Cv 30° Cv 40° Cv 50° Cv 60° Cv 70° Cv 80° Cv 90°
3 151 320 694 1237 2047 3240 4859 5340
Technical Data 1879
Service chilled, hot water, up to 60% glycol Suitable Actuators
Flow Characteristic modified equal percentage Non-Spring
Controllable Flow Range 90° rotation F6250HDU SY3
Size [mm] 10” [250]
End Fitting for use with ANSI Class 125/150 flanges
Body ductile iron ASTM A536 Dimensions (Inches [mm])
Body Finish Epoxy powder coated ceiling
Stem Packing EPDM (lubricated)

Ball Seat EPDM
Shaft 416 stainless steel
Bushings RPTFE
Disc 304 stainless steel
D
Body Pressure Rating [psi] ANSI 125, standard class B
J
Number of Bolt Holes 12 C
Lug Threads 7/8-9 UNC
Media Temperature Range -22°F to 250°F [-30°C to 120°C]
(Water)
Close-Off Pressure 50 psi
Rangeability 10:1 (for 30° to 70° range)
Maximum Velocity 12 FPS
Cv 5340
Weight 50.9 lb [23.1 kg] B
E F
Leakage 0% A
Servicing maintenance free
SY
Flow Pattern
100 A B C D E F J
90 13” [332] 2.71” 29.27” 21.50” 7.9” [2001] 36.37”
80
[68.8] [743] [546] [924]
% OF MAXIMUM FLOW
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
% OF VALVE OPENING

SY3-24
On/Off Floating Point, Non-Spring Return, 24 V
Application
SY Series actuators are fractional horsepower devices, and utilize full-wave
power supplies. Observe wire sizing and transformer sizing requirements.
Proportional models CANNOT be connected to Belimo direct coupled (AF,
AM, GM…etc) actuator power supplies or any type of half-wave device. You
MUST use a separate, dedicated transformer or power supply to power the SY
actuator. Please do not connect other automation equipment to the dedicated
SY supply source. You MUST use four wires (plus a ground) to control a
proportional control SY actuator (See SY Wiring Section).
Technical Data 2374

Power Supply 24 VAC ± 10%, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption Running 76 W
Transformer Sizing 67 VA (class 2 power source)
Electrical Connection terminal block
Overload Protection thermally protected 135°C cut-out
Operating Range Y on/off, floating point
Input Impedance 1000 Ω
Angle of Rotation 90°
Torque 1335 in-lbs [150 Nm] minimum
Duty cycle 30 %
Direction of Rotation (Motor) reversible with built-in switch
Position Indication top mounted domed indicator
Manual Override hand wheel
Running Time (Motor) 24 sec
Internal Humidity Control resistive heating element
Humidity 5 to 100% RH (UL Type 4)
Ambient Temperature Range -22°F to 150°F [-30°C to 65°C]
Storage Temperature Range -40°F to 176°F [-40°C to 80°C]

Housing NEMA 4X, IP66/67, UL enclosure type 4
Housing Material die cast aluminum alloy
Gear Train high alloy steel gear sets, self locking
Agency Listings ISO, CE, cCSAus
Noise Level (Motor) <45 dB (A)
Servicing maintenance free
Quality Standard ISO 9001
Weight 27.8 lb [12.6 kg]
Auxiliary Switch 2 x SPDT 3A resistive (0.5A inductive) @ 250
VAC, one set at +10° and one set at 85°

SY3-24
Wiring Diagrams
INSTALLATION NOTES 60 61 62 63
G G Ground
60 Do not change sensitivity or dip switch setting with power applied.
Line 1 Common
Power supply Common/Neutral and Control Signal “-”wiring to a Open
61 Volts
3 Open
common is prohibited. Terminals 4 and 6 need to be wired separately.
4 Closed
Isolation relays must be used in parallel connection of multiple Close
62
actuators using a common control signal inputs. The relays should be 5 Connect to #1 for fully
open indication
DPDT. 6
Isolation relays are required in parallel applications. The reason parallel 7 HTR
63
applications need isolation relays is that the motor uses two sets of
windings, one for each direction. When one is energized to turn the A
LS3
actuator in a specific direction a voltage is generated in the other due to B
A-C (Open Indication)
the magnetic field created from the first. It’s called back EMF. This is not C
an issue with one actuator because the voltage generated in the second
D
winding isn’t connected to anything so there is no flow. On parallel LS4
applications without isolation, this EMF voltage energizes the winding it E
D-F (Closed Indication)
is connected to on the other actuators in the system, the actuators are F
tying to turn in both directions at once. The EMF voltage is always less Contact Rating: 5A 250 VAC Max.
than the supply voltage due to the resistance of the windings, so while SY2…5-24
the actuator still turns in the commanded direction, the drag from the 24V AC/DC Transformer
other reduces the torque output and causes overheating.
! WARNING! LIVE ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS! 60 61 62 63

During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this Actuator B
G G Ground
product, it may be necessary to work with live electrical components.
Have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been Line 1 Common
properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these Voltage Open K1 *
3 Open
tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to
4 Closed
live electrical components could result in death or serious injury. Close K1-B
5
6
7 HTR
A
LS3
B

C
D
LS4
E
F
Contact Rating: 5A 250 VAC Max.
SY2…5-24
G Actuator A
G Ground
1 Common
*
3 Open
4 Closed
K1-A
5
6
7 HTR
* The isolation relays may not be needed.

Dependent on signal
A LS3
B
C
D
LS4
E
F
SY2…5-24
24V AC Transformer

SY3-24
60 61 62 63
A
LS3
B
C
D
LS4
E
F
SY2…5-24MFT

PULL BOX
Compact enclosures
AE – AE 1054.500
Date : Mar 22, 2019
Compact enclosures AE – AE 1054.500
created: 22.03.2019 on www.rittal.com/ie-en
Product description
Material: Enclosure: Sheet steel

Door: Sheet steel, all-round foamed-in PU seal
Surface finish: Enclosure and door: Dipcoat primed, powder-coated on the outside, textured paint
Mounting plate: Zinc-plated
Colour: RAL 7035
Protection category IP 66
IP to IEC 60 529:
Protection category NEMA 4

NEMA:
IK Code: IK08
Supply includes: Enclosure with hinged door(s), of all-round solid construction

Gland plate(s) in enclosure base
Mounting plate
Lock: 3 mm double-bit
Basic material: Sheet steel
Product features
Dimensions: Width: 600 mm

Height: 600 mm
Depth: 250 mm
Material thickness: Enclosure: 1.5 mm

Door: 1.75 mm
Mounting plate: 2.5 mm
© Rittal 2019 1
Mounting plate: Width: 549 mm
Height: 570 mm
Number of doors: 1
Door hinged on the yes

right, may be
swapped to the left:
Lock version: Cam
Number of locks: 2
Lock insert: 3 mm double-bit
Gland plate, size: 5
Gland plate, qty.: 1
Packs of: 1 pc(s).
Weight/pack: 24.8 kg
EAN: 4028177522923
Customs tariff 94032080

number:
ETIM 6.0: EC000261
ETIM 5.0: EC000261
eCl@ss 8.0/8.1: 27180101
eCl@ss 7.0/7.1: 27180101
eCl@ss 6.0/6.1: 27180101
eCl@ss 5.1/5.1.4: 27180102
Product description: AE Compact enclosure, WHD: 600x600x250 mm, Sheet steel, with mounting plate,
single-door, with two cam locks
Approvals
Approvals: CSA
DNV-GL
Lloyds Register of Shipping
RRR
© Rittal 2019 2
Russian Maritime Register of Shipping
TÜV UL + C-UL
Certificates: EAC
IK-Code
Protection category
Declarations: Declaration of conformity
© Rittal 2019 3
1039.500
Compact enclosures
AE – AE 1039.500
Date : Aug 2, 2017
Spare parts - Compact enclosures AE – AE 1039.500
created: 02.08.2017 build on www.rittal.com/uk-en
Product description

Colour: RAL 7035
IP to IEC 60 529:

NEMA:
IK Code: IK08

Mounting plate
Product features

Height: 380 mm
Depth: 210 mm

Door: 1.5 mm
© Rittal 2017 1
Mounting plate: 2.5 mm

Height: 355 mm
Number of doors: 1

right, may be
Lock version: Cam
Number of locks: 1
Gland plate, size: 5
Packs of: 1 pc(s).
Weight/pack: 15.4 kg
EAN: 4028177252042

number:
ETIM 6.0: EC000261
ETIM 5.0: EC000261
eCl@ss 8.0/8.1: 27180101
eCl@ss 7.0/7.1: 27180101
eCl@ss 6.0/6.1: 27180101
eCl@ss 5.1/5.1.4: 27180102
Product description AE Compact enclosure, WHD: 600x380x210 mm, Sheet steel, with mounting plate, single-
(long): door, with two cam locks
Approvals
Approvals: Bureau Veritas

CSA
DNV GL
© Rittal 2017 2
NA
TÜV UL + C-UL
Certificates: EAC
IK-Code
Protection category
2017 © Rittal Ltd UK
© Rittal 2017 3
Compact enclosures
AE – AE 1034.500
Date : Aug 3, 2017
created: 03.08.2017 build on www.rittal.com/th-en
Product description

Colour: RAL 7035
IP to IEC 60 529:

NEMA:
IK Code: IK08

Mounting plate
Product features

Height: 400 mm
Depth: 210 mm

Door: 1.5 mm
© Rittal 2017 1
Mounting plate: 2 mm

Height: 375 mm
Number of doors: 1

right, may be
Lock version: Cam
Number of locks: 1
Packs of: 1 pc(s).
Weight/pack: 8.8 kg
EAN: 4028177252011

number:
ETIM 6.0: EC000261
ETIM 5.0: EC000261
eCl@ss 8.0/8.1: 27180101
eCl@ss 7.0/7.1: 27180101
eCl@ss 6.0/6.1: 27180101
eCl@ss 5.1/5.1.4: 27180102
(long): door, with one cam lock
Approvals

CSA
DNV GL
NA
© Rittal 2017 2
TÜV UL + C-UL
Certificates: EAC
IK-Code
Protection category
2017 © Rittal Ltd.
© Rittal 2017 3
Compact enclosures AE
- 1180500
Date : Feb 28 , 2020
Compact enclosures AE - 1180500
created: 02.28.2020 build on https://www.rittal.us/
Product Description
Material Door: Carbon steel all-round foamed-in PU seal
Housing: Carbon steel
Surface finish Mounting plate: Zinc-plated

Housing and door: Dipcoat primed powder-coated on the outside
textured paint
Color RAL 7035
Protection category IP to IEC 60 529 IP 66
Protection category NEMA: NEMA 4
IK code IK08
Supply includes Mounting plate

Flange (gland) plate(s) in enclosure base
Housing with hinged door(s) of all-round solid construction
Base material Carbon steel
Dimensions Height: 1000 mm (39 ")

Width: 800 mm (31 ")
Depth: 300 mm (12 ")
Material thickness Housing: 1.5 mm (0.06 ")

Door: 2 mm (0.08 ")
Mounting plate: 3 mm (0.12 ")
Mounting plate Height: 955 mm (38 ")

Width: 739 mm (29 ")
Number of doors 1
Door catch on right, may be swapped to the left yes
Lock version Cam
No. of locks 2
Lock Insert 3 mm double-bit
Flange plate, size 5
Flange plate, qty 1
Packaging unit 1 pc(s).
Weight/packaging unit 57 kg (125.7 lb.)
EAN 4028177252424
Customs tariff number 94032080
Product description (long) AE Compact enclosure WHD: 800x1000x300 mm Sheet steel

with mounting plate single-door with two cam locks
Instrumentation Enclosures and Accessories INLINE™ Instrumentation Enclosures
Stainless Steel
Spec-00361
F
763.422.2211
763.422.2600
Instrumentation Enclosures and Accessories

EXTERIOR RVP
INLINE™, Type 4X
INLINE™ Instrumentation Enclosures
SPECIFICATIONS
• 6 gauge covers and doors and 14 gauge bodies; Type 304 or 316L
1
stainless steel
• S eams continuously welded and ground smooth
• E xternal formed body flange trough
• L arge perimeter body opening
• Fastening holes in back of body for direct mounting or optional
external mounting brackets
• S eamless foam-in-place gasket
• M6 bonding provision on cover, M6 ground stud in body
• Furnished hardware kit includes panel mounting screws,
grounding hardware and sealing washers for wall-mounting
holes
INLINE Screw-Cover Enclosures

• C aptivated Type 316 stainless steel cover screws with sealing
bushings made of a durable composite material
• Integral compression stops maintain optimal gasket compression
INLINE Hinged-Door Enclosures

• 180-degree door opening
INDUSTRY STANDARDS • Removable Type 316 stainless steel hinge pins
Mounting brackets required to meet UL/CSA external mounting • Standard self-grounding, slotted, quarter-turn Type 316 stainless
requirements. steel latch system with double seal
UL 508A Listed; Type 4, 4X, 12; File No. E61997 INLINE Window-Door Enclosures
NEMA/EEMAC Type 4, 4X, 12 • 3 /16-in. (4.8-mm) clear polycarbonate window is mounted flush
CSA File No. 42186: Type 4, 4X, 12 with cover surface
IEC 60529, IP66 • 180-degree door opening
• Removable Type 316 stainless steel hinge pins
APPLICATION • Standard self-grounding, slotted, quarter-turn Type 316 stainless
Aesthetic styling, flush latches and an attractive, stroked finish steel latch system with double seal
make INLINE™ Enclosures an excellent choice when style and FINISH
functionality are important. INLINE Enclosures have an outward
formed body flange to prevent contaminants from entering the Cover and body have smooth #4 brushed finish.
enclosure and are available in three cover styles: hinged window
door, hinged solid door and solid screw cover.
ACCESSORIES
See also Accessories.
DIN Rail or Panel Mounting Brackets
DIN3 Type Rails
Key Inserts
Mounting Bracket Kit
INLINE™ Panels
Wing Knob Latch
MODIFICATION AND CUSTOMIZATION
Hoffman excels at modifying and customizing products to
your specifications. Contact your local Hoffman sales office or
distributor for complete information.
Bulletin: A54S
1 Stainless Steel SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE EQUIPMENT PROTECTION SOLUTIONS

Spec-00361 F
Standard Product Screw-Cover

Panel Size Mounting
Stainless Steel Conductive DxE GxH F
Catalog Number AxBxC in./mm Steel Type Panel Panel mm/in. mm/in. mm/in.
LSC151512SS 5.91 x 5.91 x 4.72 304 LP1515 LP1515G 131 x 131 132 x 85 105
150 x 150 x 120 5.16 x 5.16 5.18 x 3.36 4.13
LSC151512SS6 5.91 x 5.91 x 4.72 316L LP1515 LP1515G 131 x 131 132 x 85 105
150 x 150 x 120 5.16 x 5.16 5.18 x 3.36 4.13
LSC201512SS 7.87 x 5.91 x 4.72 304 LP2015 LP2015G 181 x 131 182 x 85 105
200 x 150 x 120 7.13 x 5.16 7.15 x 3.35 4.13
200 x 150 x 120 7.13 x 5.16 7.15 x 3.35 4.13
LSC252015SS 9.84 x 7.87 x 5.91 304 LP2520 LP2520G 231 x 181 232 x 135 135
250 x 200 x 150 9.09 x 7.13 9.12 x 5.33 5.31
250 x 200 x 150 9.09 x 7.13 9.12 x 5.33 5.31
LSC302515SS 11.81 x 9.84 x 5.91 304 LP3025 LP3025G 281 x 231 281 x 185 135
300 x 250 x 150 11.06 x 9.09 11.08 x 7.30 5.31
300 x 250 x 150 11.06 x 9.09 11.08 x 7.30 5.31
LSC353020SS 13.78 x 11.81 x 7.87 304 LP3530 LP3530G 331 x 281 331 x 235 185
350 x 300 x 200 13.03 x 11.06 13.05 x 9.27 7.28
350 x 300 x 200 13.03 x 11.06 13.05 x 9.27 7.28
Purchase panels separately.
Catalog numbers ending in 6 are Type 316L stainless steel.
,1/,1(6WDLQOHVV6WHHO6FUHZ&RYHU(QFORVXUH
1RWHV
3DQHOVDUHPPJDXJHVWHHORUFRQGXFWLYHVWHHO
3DQHOVFUHZVDUH0SDQKHDG
5HDUPRXQWLQJKROHVZLOODFFRPPRGDWH0RU81&
PRXQWLQJVFUHZVVXSSOLHGE\FXVWRPHU
EQUIPMENT PROTECTION SOLUTIONS PH 763.422.2211 • FAX 763.422.2600 • HOFFMANONLINE.COM Stainless Steel 2

Spec-00361 F
Standard Product Hinged-Cover

Panel Size Mounting
Stainless Steel Conductive DxE GxH F
Catalog Number AxBxC in./mm Steel Type Panel Panel in./mm mm/in. in./mm
LHC151512SS 5.91 x 5.91 x 4.72 304 LP1515 LP1515G 5.16 x 5.16 132 x 85 4.13
150 x 150 x 120 131 x 131 5.18 x 3.36 105
LHC151512SS6 5.91 x 5.91 x 4.72 316L LP1515 LP1515G 5.16 x 5.16 132 x 85 4.13
150 x 150 x 120 131 x 131 5.18 x 3.36 105
LHC201512SS 7.87 x 5.91 x 4.72 304 LP2015 LP2015G 7.13 x 5.16 182 x 85 4.13
200 x 150 x 120 181 x 131 7.15 x 3.36 105
200 x 150 x 120 181 x 131 7.15 x 3.36 105
LHC252015SS 9.84 x 7.87 x 5.91 304 LP2520 LP2520G 9.09 x 7.13 232 x 135 5.31
250 x 200 x 150 231 x 181 9.12 x 5.33 135
250 x 200 x 150 231 x 181 9.12 x 5.33 135
LHC302515SS 11.81 x 9.84 x 5.91 304 LP3025 LP3025G 11.06 x 9.09 281 x 185 5.31
300 x 250 x 150 281 x 231 11.08 x 7.30 135
300 x 250 x 150 281 x 231 11.08 x 7.30 135
LHC353020SS 13.78 x 11.81 x 7.87 304 LP3530 LP3530G 13.03 x 11.06 331 x 235 7.28
350 x 300 x 200 331 x 281 13.05 x 9.27 185
350 x 300 x 200 331 x 281 13.05 x 9.27 185
,1/,1(6WDLQOHVV6WHHO+LQJHG'RRUDQG:LQGRZ'RRU(QFORVXUH
1RWH+LQJHGRQಯ%ರVLGHRIHQFORVXUH
ZKHQ% PPRUPP
3 Stainless Steel SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE EQUIPMENT PROTECTION SOLUTIONS

Spec-00361 F
Standard Product Window-Door

Panel Size Mounting Window Size
Stainless Steel Conductive DxE GxH MxN F
Catalog Number AxBxC in./mm Steel Type Panel Panel in./mm mm/in. in./mm in./mm
LWC201512SS 7.87 x 5.91 x 4.72 304 LP2015 LP2015G 7.13 x 5.16 182 x 85 5.87 x 2.56 3.98
200 x 150 x 120 181 x 131 7.15 x 3.36 149 x 65 101
LWC201512SS6 7.87 x 5.91 x 4.72 316L LP2015 LP2015G 7.13 x 5.16 182 x 85 5.87 x 2.56 3.98
200 x 150 x 120 181 x 131 7.15 x 3.36 149 x 65 101
250 x 200 x 150 231 x 181 9.12 x 5.33 199 x 115 131
250 x 200 x 150 231 x 181 9.12 x 5.33 199 x 115 131
300 x 250 x 150 281 x 231 11.08 x 7.30 249 x 165 131
300 x 250 x 150 281 x 231 11.08 x 7.30 249 x 165 131
200 x 400 x 150 181 x 381 7.15 x 13.20 115 x 349 131
200 x 400 x 150 181 x 381 7.15 x 13.20 115 x 349 131
200 x 600 x 150 181 x 581 7.15 x 21.08 115 x 549 131
200 x 600 x 150 181 x 581 7.15 x 21.08 115 x 549 131
,1/,1(6WDLQOHVV6WHHO+LQJHG'RRUDQG:LQGRZ'RRU(QFORVXUH
1RWH+LQJHGRQಯ%ರVLGHRIHQFORVXUH
ZKHQ% PPRUPP
EQUIPMENT PROTECTION SOLUTIONS PH 763.422.2211 • FAX 763.422.2600 • HOFFMANONLINE.COM Stainless Steel 4

Spec-00361 F
EJB & CJB
Compact enclosures
AE – AE 1033.500
Date : Aug 2, 2017
created: 02.08.2017 build on www.rittal.com/us-en
Product description
Material: Housing: Carbon steel

Door: Carbon steel, all-round foamed-in PU seal
Surface finish: Housing and door: Dipcoat primed, powder-coated on the outside, textured paint
Color: RAL 7035
IP to IEC 60 529:

NEMA:
IK code: IK08
Supply includes: Housing with hinged door(s), of all-round solid construction

Flange (gland) plate(s) in enclosure base
Mounting plate
Base material: Carbon steel
Product features
Dimensions: Height: 300 mm (12 ˝)

Width: 300 mm (12 ˝)
Depth: 210 mm (8.3 ˝)
Material thickness:: Housing: 1.38 mm (0.05 ˝)

Door: 1.5 mm (0.06 ˝)
© Rittal 2017 1
Mounting plate: 2 mm (0.08 ˝)
Mounting plate: Height: 275 mm (11 ˝)

Width: 254 mm (10 ˝)
Number of doors: 1
Door catch on right, yes

may be swapped to
the left:
Lock version: Cam
No. of locks: 1
Lock Insert: 3 mm double-bit
Flange plate, qty: 1
Packaging unit: 1 pc(s).
Weight/packaging 7 kg
unit:
EAN: 4028177252004

number:
ETIM 6.0: EC000261
ETIM 5.0: EC000261
eCl@ss 8.0/8.1: 27180101
eCl@ss 7.0/7.1: 27180101
eCl@ss 6.0/6.1: 27180101
eCl@ss 5.1/5.1.4: 27180102
(long): door, with one cam lock
Approvals

CSA
DNV GL
NA
© Rittal 2017 2
TÜV UL + C-UL
Certificates: EAC
IK-Code
Protection category
2017 © Rittal Corporation
© Rittal 2017 3
10 PIN QUICK CONNECTOR

Data sheet
HDC kits Weidmüller Interface GmbH & Co. KG
Klingenbergstraße 16
HDC-KIT-HE 10.110 D-32758 Detmold
Germany
Fon: +49 5231 14-0
Fax: +49 5231 14-292083
www.weidmueller.com

HDC kits are standardized kits for assembling complete

plug-in connectors.
The HDC kits normally consist of a male insert, a female
insert, a plug housing, a bulkhead housing and a cable
gland.
Weidmüller offers a range of standard connector
combinations with metric or PG cable entry threads.
The wire connection level is designed as a screw
element. All screw connections are equipped with a wire
protection spring.
Screw connection
General ordering data

Type HDC-KIT-HE 10.110
Order No. 1712510000
Version RockStar® HDC kits-Heavy Duty Connectors, Kit,
HE, Size: 4, Poles: 10, Screw connection, 500 V,
16 A, diecast aluminium, PG 16
GTIN (EAN) 4008190947736
Qty.

1 pc(s).
Creation date July 5, 2016 10:08:07 AM CEST

Catalogue status 30.06.2016 / We reserve the right to make technical changes. 1

Data sheet
Germany
Fon: +49 5231 14-0
Fax: +49 5231 14-292083

Technical data www.weidmueller.com
Dimensions and weights

Net weight 447.68 g

Temperatures

Limit temperature -40 °C ... 100 °C

General data

Cable gland PG 16 Connection type PE Screw connection
Material diecast aluminium No. of poles 10
Rated current (DIN EN 61984) 16 A Rated voltage (DIN EN 61984) 500 V
Series HE Size 4

Version

Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm² Conductor cross-section, min. 0.5 mm²
Material diecast aluminium Max. torque for main contact 0.55 Nm
Min. torque for main contact 0.5 Nm Size 4
Surface finish Powder coating Type of connection Screw connection

Classifications

ETIM 3.0 EC000437 ETIM 4.0 EC000437
ETIM 5.0 EC000437 ETIM 6.0 EC002636
UNSPSC 30-21-18-01 eClass 5.1 27-14-34-19
eClass 6.2 27-26-07-03 eClass 7.1 27-44-05-15
eClass 8.1 27-44-05-15 eClass 9.0 27-44-05-15
eClass 9.1 27-44-01-01

Product information

Descriptive text ordering data

Metal housing
Approvals

Approvals
ROHS

Conform


Data sheet
Germany
Fon: +49 5231 14-0
Fax: +49 5231 14-292083

Accessories www.weidmueller.com
SPB

Various accessories are available for our inserts. This
includes coding elements for the inserts.

Type Order No. Version GTIN (EAN) Qty.
SPB-M 3 1203600000 Heavy Duty Connectors, 4008190120047 100 pc(s).
Accessories, Lock bolts

HDC COS

Various accessories are available for our inserts. This
includes coding elements for the inserts.

Type Order No. Version GTIN (EAN) Qty.
HDC COS 32 1430800000 Heavy Duty Connectors, 4008190176181 1 pc(s).
Accessories, Coding
System
Accessories, Coding
System
Accessories, Coding
System



Data sheet 16 PIN QUICK CONNECTOR

Germany
Fon: +49 5231 14-0
Fax: +49 5231 14-292083
www.weidmueller.com

HDC kits are standardized kits for assembling complete

plug-in connectors.
The HDC kits normally consist of a male insert, a female
insert, a plug housing, a bulkhead housing and a cable
gland.
Weidmüller offers a range of standard connector
combinations with metric or PG cable entry threads.
The wire connection level is designed as a screw
element. All screw connections are equipped with a wire
protection spring.
Screw connection

Type HDC-KIT-HE 16.120
Order No. 1712520000
Version RockStar® HDC kits-Heavy-duty connectors, Kit,
HE, Size: 6, Poles: 16, Screw connection, 500 V,
16 A, diecast aluminium, PG 21
GTIN (EAN) 4008190947743
Qty.

1 pc(s).
Creation date February 22, 2019 6:55:40 PM CET


Data sheet
Germany
Fon: +49 5231 14-0
Fax: +49 5231 14-292083

Technical data www.weidmueller.com
Dimensions and weights

Net weight 626.68 g

Temperatures

Limit temperature -40 °C ... 100 °C

Environmental Product Compliance

REACH SVHC Lead 7439-92-1

General data

Cable glands PG 21 Connection type PE Screw connection
Material diecast aluminium No. of poles 16
Rated current (DIN EN 61984) 16 A Rated voltage (DIN EN 61984) 500 V
Series HE Size 6

Version

Conductor cross-section, max. 2.5 mm² Conductor cross-section, min. 0.5 mm²
Material diecast aluminium Max. torque for main contact 0.55 Nm
Min. torque for main contact 0.5 Nm Size 6
Surface finish Powder coating Type of connection Screw connection

Classifications

ETIM 3.0 EC000437 ETIM 4.0 EC000437
ETIM 5.0 EC000437 ETIM 6.0 EC002636
UNSPSC 30-21-18-01 eClass 5.1 27-14-34-19
eClass 6.2 27-26-07-03 eClass 7.1 27-44-05-15
eClass 8.1 27-44-05-15 eClass 9.0 27-44-01-01
eClass 9.1 27-44-01-01

Product information

Descriptive text ordering data

Metal housing
Approvals

Approvals
ROHS

Conform
Downloads

Brochure/Catalogue CAT 3 HDC 17/18 EN
FL FIELDWIRING EN
Engineering Data

EPLAN, WSCAD, Zuken E3.S
Creation date February 22, 2019 6:55:40 PM CET


4VT2-LD4-4-DR-UNV-L850-CD1-WL-SSL-U
LIGHTING FIXTURES
Metalux
D ES C R IPTION
Type
Catalog #
The Vaportite LED Series is an energy efficient industrial Vaportite
fixture that features rugged and durable construction. The Vaportite
LED incorporates a full metal fixture liner inside a reinforced fiberglass Project
housing with a high impact diffuser. This Vaportite series is suitable for
interior and exterior applications and can be surface or chain mounted. Date
Comments
The Vaportite LED Series has been designed for maximum operation in
commercial institutional and industrial environments and can operate in Prepared by
a wide range of temperatures (-20°C to 25°C) and is ideal for cold storage
environments.
S PEC IFIC A TION FEA T U R E S
Construction E le ctrica l Lens

Fiberglass housing is reinforced Long-Life LED system coupled with DR=Internal Prismatic Lens/15% DR
polyester and self-extinguishing electrical driver to deliver optimal High Impact Additive.
(ASTM-D635-74) plastic of a performance. LED’s available in DR100=Internal Prismatic
permanent pearl gray color. A 3500, 4000 and 5000K with a CRI ≥ Lens/100% DR High Impact
watertite hub for 1/2” conduit 85. Projected life is 60,000 hours at Additive.
entry is provided at each end of 91% lumen output. cULus listed.
housing (standard) for continuous Electronic drivers are available for Warranty
feed. Polyurethane gasketing is 120-277V applications. A 0-10V Vaportite LED features a five year
formed in the housing providing a dimming control is available limited warranty.
continuous seamless seal for the (standard). IP65 rated and NSF
diffuser. Four sturdy cam latches certified (4’ only). Compliance
clamp diffuser tightly for a positive
seal between housing, gasketing
UL/cUL listed for Wet location.
RoHS compliant, and LED modules
VAPORTITE
and diffuser. Electrical components comply with IESNA LM-79 and LED
and fixtures are UL/ cUL listed for LM-80 standards. DesignLights
Wet Locations. Consortium™ Qualified and
classified for DLC Standard, refer to
4' INDUSTRIAL
www.designlights.org for details.
LED LAMP
Vaportite Industrial
Refrigerated Case
5-7/8"
[149mm]
7" [178mm]
MOUNTING D A TA
41-1/2" [1054mm]
Optional Back Hub
Locations
38-3/4" [984mm]
1/4" x 28" Stud
(2 Places)
6-5/8"
[168mm]
X=5-3/8"
X Y
[137mm] ENERGY DATA
Y=5-3/8"
49-13/16" [1265mm]
[102mm]
Input Watts:
4VT2-LD4-4 (4,000 lumens)=38W
4VT2-LD4-6 (6,000 lumens)=57.3W
4VT2-LD4-8 (8,000 lumens)=81.1W
INS TA LLA TION D A TA
MOUNTING BRACKETS OPTIONAL CHAN HANGING SET

Furnished (VT2-CHAIN/SET-U)
Two per 2' and 4' Unit Includes 6 ft. of chain, 4 large S-Hooks and
Four per 8' Unit 4 small S-Hooks
Order One (1) Kit for each 2' or 4' Fixture
Safe and convenient means of

disconnecting power
ADF142831
2017-05-04 08:42:04
4’ V AP OR T IT E LE D
PH OTOM ETR IC S
4VT2-LD4-8-FR50- Candlepower
4VT2-LD4-6-DR- Candlepower
90˚ UNV-L835-CD1- Angle Along II 45° Across ⊥
90˚ UNV-L835-CD1-U Angle Along II 45° Across ⊥
WL-U 0 2854 2854 2854
Electronic Driver 0 2000 2000 2000 75˚
75˚
5 2007 1979 1980
Electronic Driver 5 2857 2829 2842
Linear LED 3500K 1000 10 2811 2790 2804
700 10 1981 1951 1956 60˚ Linear LED 3500K 15 2733 2723 2742
60˚ Spacing criterion: 15 1930 1900 1903
Spacing criterion: 20 2626 2629 2658
(II) 1.2 x mounting 20 1857 1836 1844
25 2484 2508 2545
25 1764 1748 1765
2000 (II) 1.2 x mounting
1400 height, (⊥) 1.2 x 45˚ 30 2316 2365 2408
45˚ 30 1645 1646 1660 height, (⊥) 1.3 x
mounting height 35 2120 2195 2253
35 1511 1522 1534 mounting height 40 1904 2011 2086
Lumens: 5882 40 1375 1393 1468 3000
45 1678 1819 1914
2100
45 1221 1271 1438 0˚ 15˚ 30˚
Lumens: 8553
0˚ 15˚ 30˚ Input Watts: 56W 1062 1207 1343
50 1451 1622 1736
50 Input Watts: 81W 55 1222 1422 1558
Efficacy: 104.7 lm/W 55 903 1175 1148
60 1009 1229 1368
60 749 1048 933 Efficacy: 105.5 lm/W
Test Report: 65 600 1151 771
65 810 1034 1171
Test Report: 70 622 843 959
4VT2-LD4-6-DR- 70 461 591 600
4VT2-LD4-8-FR50- 75 446 659 748
UNV-L835-CD1-U. 75 332 398 426
287 487 555
206 249 255 UNV-L835-CD1-WL- 80
IES 80
85 148 341 392
85 94 137 127 U.IES 45 228 271
90
90 34 75 63
C o e f fi c i e n t s o f U t i l i z a t i o n
C o e f fi c i e n t s o f U t i l i z a t i o n
Effective floor cavity reflectance 20%
Effective floor cavity reflectance 20%
rc 80% 70% 50% 30% 10% 0%
rc 80% 70% 50% 30% 10% 0% rw 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 0
rw 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 0 RCR
RCR
0 118 118 118 118 115 115 115 115 109 109 109 104 104 104 99 99 99 96
0 119 119 119 119 116 116 116 116 110 110 110 105 105 105 101 101 101 99
1 107 102 97 93 104 99 95 91 94 91 87 90 87 84 85 83 81 79
1 108 103 98 94 105 101 96 93 96 93 90 92 89 87 88 86 84 82
2 97 88 81 75 94 86 79 74 82 76 72 78 73 69 74 71 67 65
2 98 89 82 76 95 87 81 75 84 78 73 80 75 71 77 73 70 67
3 88 77 69 62 85 75 68 61 72 65 60 69 63 58 66 61 57 54
3 89 78 70 63 86 76 69 62 73 67 61 70 65 60 68 63 59 56
4 81 68 59 53 78 67 58 52 64 57 51 61 55 50 59 53 49 46
4 81 69 60 53 79 68 59 53 65 58 52 62 56 51 60 55 50 48
5 74 61 52 45 72 60 51 45 57 50 44 55 48 43 53 47 42 40
5 75 62 52 46 73 60 52 45 58 51 45 56 49 44 54 48 44 41
6 69 55 46 39 66 54 45 39 52 44 38 50 43 38 48 42 37 35
6 69 55 46 40 67 54 46 40 52 45 39 51 44 39 49 43 38 36
7 64 50 41 35 62 49 41 35 47 40 34 45 39 34 44 38 33 31
7 64 50 41 35 62 49 41 35 48 40 35 46 39 34 45 38 34 32
8 59 46 37 31 57 45 37 31 43 36 30 42 35 30 40 34 30 28
8 59 46 37 31 58 45 37 31 44 36 31 42 35 31 41 35 30 28
9 55 42 34 28 54 41 33 28 40 32 27 38 32 27 37 31 27 25
9 56 42 34 28 54 41 33 28 40 33 28 39 32 28 38 32 27 25
10 52 39 31 25 50 38 30 25 37 30 25 36 29 25 34 29 24 23
10 52 39 31 25 51 38 31 25 37 30 25 36 30 25 35 29 25 23
Zonal Lumen Summary

Zonal Lumen Summary
Zone Lumens % Fixture

Zone Lumens % Fixture
0-30 2200 25.7
0-30 1536 26.1
0-40 3573 41.8
0-40 2490 42.3
0-60 6232 96.4
0-60 4463 75.9
0-90 8248 100.0
0-90 5804 98.7
0-180 8553 100.0
0-180 5882 100.0
L UMEN M A INTENA NC E
TM-21 Lumen Theoretical

Ambient Maintenance L70
Temperature (60,000 hours) (Hours)
25°C > 91% > 247,000
ORDER ING INFOR M A TION
SAMPLE NUMBER: 4VT2-LD4-4-DR-UNV-L840-CD1-WL-U
Series (2) Distribution Lamps WL=Wet Options Packaging

4VT2=4' Vaportite [Blank]=Medium L835=3500K, LED Location SSL=Stainless Steel U=Unit Pack
(Standard) L840=4000K, LED Label Latches
Lamp Type W=Wide Distribution L850=5000K, LED TH=(2) Top Watertite Hubs
LD4=LED 4.0 TEH=(2) Top and (2) End
Voltage Driver Type Watertite Hubs (all
LED Lumens Output UNV=Universal Voltage 120-277 CD1=1 Dimming Driver Watertite Hubs have 1/2"
4=4000 Lumens 5LTD1=Fifth Light DALI Conduit Entry)
6=6000 Lumens EL10W=10-watt, 120-277V emergency
battery pack installed (3) Accessories (order separately)
8=8000 Lumens VT2-Chain/Set-U=Chain Hanging Set
VT-REM-EL=Remote Emergency Installed, 700 lumens (3)
Includes 6 ft. of chain, 4 large
Lens S-Hooks and 4 small S-Hooks
DR=Internal Prismatic Lens/15% DR High Impact Additive
Order One (1) Kit for each
DR100=Internal Prismatic Lens/100% DR High Impact Additive
2' or 4' Fixture
FR50=Frosted Lens/15% DR High Impact Additive (1)
VT2-SS-MBK=Stainless
Steel Mounting Bracket
(1) (2)
NOTES: Not availablie in wide distribution. DesignLights Consortium™ Qualified and classified for DLC Standard (some models are not DLC qualified), refer to
www.designlights.org for details. (3) EL must specify 120 or 277V only.
Specifications & dimensions subject to change without notice. Consult your Eaton Representative for availability and ordering information.
SH IP P ING D A T A
Catalog No. Wt.
4VT2-LD4 18 lbs.
Eaton
1121 Highway 74 South
Peachtree City, GA 30269 Specifications and
P: 770-486-4800 dimensions subject to ADF142831
www.eaton.com/lighting change without notice. 2017-05-04 08:42:04
WPSLED 30 UNV PC
D ES C R IPTION
Lumark
The Lumark WPSLED wall luminaire provides traditional architectural Type
Catalog #
style with high performance energy efficient illumination. Rugged
die-cast aluminum construction, stainless steel hardware along with a
sealed and gasketed optical compartment make the Wal-Pak virtually Project
impenetrable to contaminants. IP66 Rated. UL/cUL wet location listed.
Replaces up to 100W metal halide equivalent. The WPSLED wall Date
Comments
luminaire is ideal for pathway illumination, building entrances, vehicle
ramps, schools, tunnels, stairways and loading docks.
Prepared by
S PEC IFIC A TION FEA T U R E S
Housing packages. Available in cool 5000K withstand a 4kV surge test and is
Rugged die-cast aluminum housing or netrual warm 4000K LED color Class 2 rated for 120-277V, 50/60Hz
and hinged, removable die-cast temperature (CCT). with an operating temperature of
aluminum door. One-piece silicone -40º to 40ºC. Wal-Pak LED systems
gasket seals the optical chamber. El e c tri c a l maintain greater than 94% of the
UL 1598 wet location listed and LED driver and related electrical initial light output after 50,000
IP66 ingress protection rated. Three components are hard mounted to hours of operation.
1/2” threaded conduit entry points the die-cast housing for optimal
allow for thru-branch wiring. heat sinking and operating Fin ish
efficiency. Wiring is extended Finished in five-stage super UV
Op t i c a l through a silicone gasket at the stabilized polyester powder coat
Highly reflective anodized back of the housing. LED thermal paint for superior protection
aluminum reflectors provide high management system incorporates against fade and wear. Standard
efficiency illumination. Optical both conduction and natural color is bronze.
assemblies include impact resistant convection to transfer heat rapidly WPSLED
borosilicate refractive glass. Solid away from LED source. Integral Op tion s
state LED luminaires are thermally LED electronic driver incorporates Optional wire guard and visor are
optimized with one lumen internal fusing designed to available. 27W
LED
WALL MOUNT LUMINAIRE
D IMENS IONS MOUNT ING D E T A IL
8-11/16"
[220mm]
2-3/4" 3-5/16"
[70mm] [82mm]
9-1/2" [240mm] 8-1/2" [215mm] 1-15/16"

[49mm]
2-7/16"
[62mm]
3-5/16"
[82mm]
TECHNICAL DATA
UL/cUL Wet Location Listed
IP66 Rated
40°C Maximum Ambient Temperature
DesignLights Consortium® Qualified*
SHIPPING DATA
Approximate Net Weight:
5.25 lbs. (2.38 kgs.)
TD514025EN
*www.designlights.org January 25, 2018 11:05 AM
page 2 W P S LE D
POWER A ND LUM ENS C U R R E N T DR AW L UME N MA INT E NA NCE
4000K WPSLED-30 Model Series TM-21 Lumen

Ambient Theoretical L70
Maintenance
Delivered Lumens 3382 Voltage (V) WPSLED-30 Temperature (Hours)
(50,000 Hours)
CCT (Kelvin) 4000 Current (A) 4000K / 5000K
CRI (Color Rendering Index) 70 120V 0.23 25°C > 94.88% > 346,000
Power Consumption (Watts) 27 208V 0.13 40°C > 94.03% > 294,000
5000K WPSLED-30 240V 0.12
Delivered Lumens 3435 277V 0.10
CCT (Kelvin) 5000
CRI (Color Rendering Index) 70
Power Consumption (Watts) 27
L UMEN M ULTIPLIER
Ambient Lumen
Temperature Multiplier
10°C 1.03
15°C 1.02
25°C 1.00
40°C 0.97
ORDER ING INFOR M A TION
Sample Number: WPSLED-30-GL-UNV
Product Family 1, 2 Lamp Wattage Door/Glass Voltage Options (Add as Suffix) 3 Accessories (Order Separately)
WPSLED 30=27W GL=Borosilicate Glass Door UNV=120-277V Blank=70 CRI / 4000K WGS/WLPAK=Wire Guard WPSLED
347=347V 7050=70 CRI / 5000K VSS/WLPAK=Visor for WPSLED
PC=120-277V Button Photocontrol
10kV=10kV Surge Protection
NOTES:
1. Available in bronze only.
2. DesignLights Consortium ® Qualified. Refer to www.designlights.org Qualified Products List under Family Models for details.
3. Extended lead times apply.
Eaton
1121 Highway 74 South
Peachtree City, GA 30269 Specifications and
P: 770-486-4800 dimensions subject to TD514025EN
www.eaton.com/lighting change without notice. January 25, 2018 11:05 AM
LHQM-LED- G EXIT & EMERGENCY LIGHT
Catalog
Number
Notes
FEATURES & SPECIFICATIONS
INTENDED USE — Suitable for applications requiring both exit sign and unit equipment. Attractive, 8"
Type
tall, streamlined design is great for above-the-door applications and other tight fits. Optional high-output
version with remote lamps are ideal for emergency egress lighting. Certain airborne contaminants
can diminish integrity of acrylic and/or polycarbonate. Click here for Acrylic- Polycarbonate
Compatibility table for suitable uses.
CONSTRUCTION — Engineering-grade thermoplastic housing is impact-resistant, scratch-resistant and
corrosion-proof. UL94V-O flame rating. UV-stable resin resists discoloration from natural and man-made
light sources.
Rugged unibody housing snaps together with no additional fasteners. Faceplate and back cover are inter- Thermoplastic Exits
changeable on housing. Positive snap-fit tabs hold faceplate securely, yet are easily removable for lamp
compartment access. Universal, directional chevron inserts are easily removed and reinserted.
LHQM LED
Uniform graphics illumination without shadows or hot spots. Letters are 6" high with 3/4" stroke, with 100 ft.
viewing distance rating based upon UL924 standard.
LEDs mounted on primary circuit boards for sign illumination. Low-energy LED lamp in sign operates in normal
(AC input) and emergency (DC input) modes.
Low-profile, integrated test switch/pilot light. Easily viewed bright red status indicator.
Unique track-and-swivel arrangement permits full range of direction of lamp head adjustment. Universal J-box
mounting pattern. Tool-less access for maintenance. Conduit entry position on top of unit. LED Lamp Head
U.S. Patent No. 6,848,798; 6,499,866; 6,142,648; 5,797,673; D379,373; 5,526,251; D484,272; Nickel-Cadmium Battery
D473,672; 5,611,163; 5,646,502.
OPTICS — Twin LED lamp heads operate in emergency (DC input) mode with 12 series-parallel white LEDs HO R0
in each head. Provides redundant light sources to ensure emergency lighting performance. The typical life of
the exit LED lamp is 10 years.
ELECTRICAL — Dual-voltage input capability (120/277V). Edge connector on printed circuit board ensures
long-term durability.
Current-limiting charger maximizes battery life and minimizes energy consumption. Provides low operating
costs.
Short-circuit protection — current-limiting charger circuitry protects printed circuit board from shorts. INSTALLATION — Top, end or back mounting. Housing snaps to canopy with positive-locking tabs. Cam
Thermal compensation adjusts charger output to provide optimum charge voltage relative to ambient locking pin secures housing to canopy.
temperature. Easily removed mounting knockouts. Conduit entry knockout for 1/2" flexible conduit. J-box pattern on back panel.
Regulated charge voltage maintains constant-charge voltage over a wide range of line voltages. Prevents over/ LISTINGS — UL damp location listed standard 50°-104°F (10°-40°C). Meets UL 924, NFPA 101 (current Life
undercharging that shortens battery life and reduces capacity. Safety Code), NEC and OSHA illumination standards.
Filtered charger input minimizes charge voltage ripple and extends battery life. WARRANTY — 5-year limited warranty. (Battery is prorated). Complete warranty terms located at
AC/LVD reset allows battery connection before AC power is applied and prevents battery damage from www.AcuityBrands.com/CustomerResources/Terms_and_Conditions.aspx.
deep discharge. Note: Actual performance may differ as a result of end-user environment and application.
Single multi-color LED indicator to display two-state charging, test activation and three-state diagnostic test. All values are design or typical values, measured under laboratory conditions at 25 °C.
Test switch provides manual activation of 30-second diagnostic testing for on-demand visual inspection. Specifications subject to change without notice.
Self-diagnostic testing for 30 seconds every 30 days, 30 minutes at 180-day interval, and 90 minutes annually.
Diagnostic evaluation of LED light source, AC-to-DC transfer, charging and battery condition.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free nickel-cadmium battery delivers 90-minute capacity to emergency
lamps. Two-state contstant-current charge maximizes battery life and automatically recharges after battery
discharge. Low-voltage disconnect prevents excessively deep discharge that can permanently damage the bat-
tery. Optional high-output battery to power both local and optional LED remote lamp heads simultaneously.
ORDERING INFORMATION Lead times will vary depending on options selected. Consult with your sales representative. Example: LHQM LED G
LHQM LED
Family Lamp type Housing color Letter color Options
LHQM Stencil face, LED Two (blank) White R Red HO High-output Ni-cad battery NOM Meets Mexican standards1
single face plate 1.5W/9.6V B Black G Green HO R0 High-output option, less lamp heads NOM SALIDA Salida signage (non-UL)2
with extra face white LED
plate SD Self-diagnostics
Accessories: Order as separate catalog number. Notes

1 Available in black or white. Consult factory for options.
ELA Q L0309 SD Single LED indoor remote head, white, self-diagnostics 3,4,5 ELA WG3 Wireguard, 30” W x 13-1/2” H x 6” D6 2 Only available in white. NOM standard.
ELA T Q L0309 SD Twin LED indoor remote head, white, self-diagnostics 3,4,5 ELA WG2M Wireguard, 21-1/4” W x 15” H x 12” D6 3 Only compatible with self-diagnostic option. (ex: HO SD)
ELA QWP L0309 SD Single LED weather-proof remote head, gray, self- ELA LQMUS12 12” white stem kit7 4 Also available in black. Add "B" after ELA to order black
diagnostics 3,4,5 finish. Example: ELA B Q L0309.
5 Only compatible with HO option . See spec sheet ELA-Q-LED.
ELA T QWP L0309 SD Twin LED weather-proof remote head, gray, self- ELA LED M12 Single LED remote lamp8,9 6 See spec sheet ELA-WG.
diagnostics 3,4,5 7 See spec sheet ELA-Stemkits.
ELA Q L0309 Single LED indoor remote head, white4,5 ELA LED T M12 Twin LED remote lamp8,9 8 See spec sheet ELA LED (Contractor Select LED Remotes).
ELA T Q L0309 Twin LED indoor remote head, white4,5 ELA LED WP M12 Single LED Weather proof remote lamp 8,9 9 Not available with SD.
ELA QWP L0309 Single LED weather-proof remote head, gray4,5 ELA LED T WP M12 Twin LED Weather proof remote lamp 8,9
ELA T QWP L0309 Twin LED weather-proof remote head, gray4,5
EMERGENCY LHQM-LED
LHQM LED QUANTUM® Exit/Unit Combo
SPECIFICATIONS MOUNTING
All dimensions are inches (centimeters).
Shipping weight: 3.6 lbs. (1.6 kgs.).
Electrical Face
Primary Circuit
19-1/4
Typical Supply Max Max (48.9)
LED life1 voltage amps watts
120 .05 4.3
Red and green LED 10 years
277 .03 4.3
8
(20.3)
BATTERY
Ni-Cad Test switch/
12
Typical Typical Optimum (30.5) pilot light
Voltage Maintenance3
Shelf life2 life2 temperature4
50-104°F
Top End
9.6 3 years 7-9 years none
(10-40°C) 4-3/4
(11.1) 1/2” flexible conduit entry knockout
1 Based on continuous operation.
2 At 77°F (25°C).
3 All life safety equipment, including emergency lighting path of egress, must be maintained, serviced and tested
in accordance with all National Fire Protection Association and local codes. Failure to perform the required 9 5-5/8
(22.9) (14.3)
maintenance, service or testing could jeopardize the safety of occupants and will void all warranties.
4 Optimum ambient temperature range where unit will provide capacity for 90 minutes. Higher and lower
temperatures affect life and capacity.
5. Battery life is negatively impacted by many variables including temperature, charging rates, number of cycles
and deep discharges due to long periods of time without AC power. 2-1/4
(5.7) Backplate
Universal knockout
Remote Output Capacity pattern for various
standard j-boxes
8
Standard Combo/high-output Combo/high-output (HO) (20.3)
Combo
unit battery(HO) and no heads (RO) 4
NA NA 3W 6W (10.2)
6
(15.2)
12
(30.5)
LAMP PHOTOMETRICS
QUANTUM LED SERIES – SINGLE COVERAGE
3W Total White LEDs 1 FC average 1 FC average
Using a single unit at a typical 7.5’ mounting height delivers an average illuminance of 1.0 FC
over a distance of 24’ on a 3’ path of egress and 18’ on a 6’ path of egress.
24'
18'
3' 6'
Example of single LHQM LED exit Example of single LHQM LED exit
illuminating a 3' path of egress illuminating a 6' path of egress
25' 20'
1 FC average 1 FC average
QUANTUM LED SERIES – MULTIPLE COVERAGE

3W Total White LEDs
Using multiple units at a typical 7.5’ mounting height delivers 25’ center-to-center spacing on a
3’ path of egress and 20’ center-to-center spacing on a 6’ path of egress. 6'
3'
Example of multiple LHQM LED exits Example of multiple LHQM LED exits
illuminating a 3' path of egress illuminating a 6' path of egress
EXTENDED RUN-TIME FOR HIGH-OUTPUT EXITS

Product Run time
LHQM LED HO (no remotes) 3.8 hours
LHQM LED HO R0 (no remotes) 7.5 hours
LHQM-LED
EMERGENCY: One Lithonia Way Conyers, GA 30012 Phone: 800-334-8694 www.lithonia.com © 2012-2017 Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc. All rights reserved. Rev. 08/02/17
1. What is a GFCI? 2. The GFCI's features Screw (terminal) colors:
! CAUTION BACK VIEW
Green = grounding terminal
A GFCI receptacle is different from FRONT VIEW
conventional receptacles. In the event of a LINE *Back wire Silver = WHITE terminals
• To prevent severe shock or ground fault, a GFCI will trip and quickly stop Hot terminal Brass or Black = HOT terminals
electrocution always turn the power the flow of electricity to prevent serious injury. Receptacle (Brass or Black):
OFF at the service panel before Connection for
working with wiring. Definition of a ground fault: the LINE cable's LINE
Instead of following its normal safe path, black wire White terminal (Silver):
RESET
Installing and • Use this GFCI with copper or
copper-clad wire. Do not use it
electricity passes through a person's body to
reach the ground. For example, a defective button: Outlet Connection for the LINE
cable's white wire
appliance can cause a ground fault. See step 8 LOAD
Testing a GFCI with aluminum wire.
Hot terminal (Brass or Black):
WHITE WIRE
FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS
A GFCI receptacle does NOT protect against
HOT WIRE
FIL BLANC
LOAD
Receptacle Connection for the LOAD
SUIVEZ INSTRUCTIONS
FIL ACTIF
• Do not install this GFCI receptacle RESET
TEST MENSUEL
TEST MONTHLY
circuit overloads, short circuits, or shocks. For RESET
cable's black wire White terminal (Silver):
on a circuit that powers life support example, you can still be shocked if you touch
equipment because if the GFCI trips bare wires while standing on a non-conducting TEST
TEST Connection for the LOAD
surface, such as a wood floor. TEST A yellow sticker cable's white wire
it will shut down the equipment.
button: Outlet covers the LOAD
• For installation in wet locations, NOTE: See step 8 terminals. DO
Please read this leaflet protect the GFCI receptacle with GFCI's contain a lockout feature that will NOT remove the
completely before getting started. prevent RESET if: sticker at this time
a weatherproof cover that will Self-Ground (Remove only if load Grounding terminal (Green):
keep both the receptacle and • There is no power being supplied to Clip Green/ terminals will be Connection for bare copper
any plugs dry. the GFCI. used and then break or green wire
Red
• The GFCI is miswired due to reversal of Mounting off tab with pliers)
Status
• Must be installed in accordance with the LINE and LOAD leads.
Bracket Indicator
national and local electrical codes. • The GFCI cannot pass its internal test,
indicating that it may not be able to provide
LED * Back wire LINE terminals have a captive clamp feature
to ease insertion of wires for first time wiring only.
PK-A3080-10-00-2C protection in the event of a ground fault.
3. Should you install it? 4. LINE vs. LOAD 5. Turn the power OFF 6. Identify cables/wires Procedure: box with two (2) cables (4-6 wires):
Placement in circuit:
(a) Detach one cable's white wire and hot The GFCI's place in the circuit determines if
Installing a GFCI receptacle can be more A cable consists of 2 or 3 wires. Plug an electrical device, such as a lamp or Important: it protects other receptacles in the circuit.
wires from the receptacle and cap each
complicated than installing a conventional radio, into the receptacle on which you are DO NOT install the GFCI receptacle in an one separately with a wire connector.
receptacle. Cable Wires working. Turn the lamp or radio ON. Then, go electrical box containing (a) more than four (4) Make sure that they are from the same Sample circuit:
to the service panel. Find the breaker or fuse wires (not including the grounding wires) or cable.
Make sure that you: that protects that receptacle. Place the breaker (b) cables with more than two (2) wires (not
in the OFF position or completely remove the including the grounding wire). Contact a A B C
WEB VERSION
fuse. The lamp or radio must turn OFF. qualified electrician if either (a) or (b) are true. (b) Re-install the receptacle in the electrical LINE LINE LINE
• Understand basic wiring principles and box, attach faceplate, then turn the power
techniques ON at the service panel. Service
LINE cable: If you are replacing an old receptacle, pull it out Panel
• Can interpret wiring diagrams Delivers power from the service panel (breaker of the electrical box without disconnecting the
wires. (c) Determine if power is flowing to the
panel or fuse box) to the GFCI. If there is only receptacle. If so, the capped wires are the LOAD LOAD
• Have circuit wiring experience one cable entering the electrical box, it is the LOAD wires. If not, the capped wires are
LINE cable. This cable should be connected to • If you see one cable (2-3 wires), it is the the LINE wires.
the GFCI's LINE terminals only. LINE cable. The receptacle is probably in Placing the GFCI in position A will also
• Are prepared to take a few minutes to test position C (see diagram to the right). provide protection to "load side"
your work, making sure that you have wired Remove the receptacle and go to step 7A. (d) Turn the power OFF at the service panel, receptacles B and C. On the other hand,
the GFCI receptacle correctly LOAD cable: label the LINE and LOAD wires, then
Delivers power from the GFCI to another placing the GFCI in position C will not
remove the receptacle. provide protection to receptacles A or B.
receptacle in the circuit. This cable should be Next, plug in and turn ON the lamp or radio at • If you see two cables (4-6 wires), the
connected to the GFCI's LOAD terminals only. the receptacle's other outlet to make sure the receptacle is probably in position A or B Remember that receptacles A, B, and C
(see diagram to the right). Follow steps a-e (e) Go to step 7B. can be in different rooms.
The LOAD terminals are under the yellow power is OFF at both outlets. If the power is not
sticker. DO NOT remove the sticker at this time. OFF, stop work and call an electrician to of the procedure to the right.
complete the installation.
Procedure:
7. Connect the wires (choose A or B)... only after reading other side completely
(a) This GFCI is shipped from the factory in the tripped condition and cannot be reset until it is wired
A: One Cable (2 or 3 wires) entering the box OR B: Two cables (4 or 6 wires) entering the box correctly and power is supplied to the device. Plug a lamp or radio into the GFCI (and leave it plugged RESET
RESET
in). Turn the power ON at the service panel. Ensure that the GFCI is still in the tripped condition TEST
TEST
Grounding LINE cable brings power to the GFCI LINE cable brings power to the GFCI by pressing the TEST button. If the lamp or radio is OFF, and the GFCI will not reset, go to the
Grounding connection Troubleshooting section as the Line and Load connections are reversed.
connection to
to box (if box has a (b) Press the RESET button fully and release. If the Status Indicator Light turns Green and the lamp or
box (if box has a White
grounding terminal) radio is ON, the GFCI has been installed correctly. If the Status Indicator Light turns or continuously
grounding terminal) White
Yellow blinks Red, or the GFCI cannot be reset, go to the Self-Test Operation section.
sticker Wire (c) If you installed your GFCI using step 7B, plug a lamp or radio into surrounding receptacles to see which
remains Connector one(s), in addition to the GFCI, lose power when you press the GFCI TEST button. Place a "GFCI RESET
RESET
Wire in place Green PROTECTED OUTLET" sticker on every receptacle that lost power, then press the RESET button to ET ST
TEST
(or bare copper)
Connector to cover reset the GFCI. DO NOT plug life saving devices into any of the receptacles that lost power.
Black
the LOAD (d) Press the TEST button (then RESET button) every month to assure proper operation. If the Status
WHITE WIRE
Black
HOT WIRE
FIL BLANC
FIL ACTIF
terminals Electrical Indicator Light does not turn Green when the RESET button is depressed and then released, or the
Box GFCI cannot be reset, it must be replaced.
WHITE WIRE
Black
HOT WIRE
FIL BLANC
FIL ACTIF
Electrical
White TROUBLESHOOTING
Box Turn the power OFF and check the wire connections against the appropriate wiring diagram in step 7A or 7B. Make sure that
RESET
RESET
LOAD cable feeds there are no loose wires or loose connections. If the Status Indicator Light is not ON and the device is unable to reset this TEST
TEST
power to other could be a result of no power available. Start the test from the beginning of step 8 if you rewired any connections to the GFCI.
receptacle(s)
Green SELF-TEST OPERATION
(or bare copper)
About Wire Connections: • A Self-Test GFCI receptacle has all the features of a conventional GFCI receptacle. In addition, this receptacle tests itself periodically to confirm
About Wire Connections: Back Wire: the GFCI electronics are functional. The Status Indicator Light will be solid green when the GFCI is powered from Line side and working correctly.
Side Wire: • Self-Test Indications: If the Status Indicator Light is solid or flashing RED a problem may exist. Press the TEST button to trip the GFCI. If unable
Side Wire: Back Wire: 3/4" (1.9 cm) 5/8" (1.6 cm) to Reset, replace the GFCI. NOTE: The status indicator may flash Red at power "ON" and Reset.
Wire Wire
3/4" (1.9 cm) 5/8" (1.6 cm)
Wire Wire Self Test Description Self Test Description Self Test Description
Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No.
For Side wire - For Back wire - GFNT1-HGx 15A-125VAC, 60Hz Hospital Grade GFTR1-HGx 15A-125VAC, 60Hz Hospital Grade GFWT1-HGx 15A-125VAC, 60Hz Hospital Grade
Loop clockwise 2/3 of the Insert bare wire fully and
WHITE WIRE
Non-Tamper Resistant GFCI Tamper Resistant GFCI Weather/Tamper Resistant GFCI
HOT WIRE
FIL BLANC
FIL ACTIF
For Side wire - For Back wire - way around screw tighten terminal clamp on GFNT2-HGx 20A-125VAC, 60Hz Hospital Grade GFTR2-HGx 20A-125VAC, 60Hz Hospital Grade GFWT2-HGx 20A-125VAC, 60Hz Hospital Grade
Loop clockwise 2/3 of the Insert bare wire fully
WHITE WIRE
HOT WIRE
FIL BLANC
FIL ACTIF
conductor ONLY Non-Tamper Resistant GFCI Tamper Resistant GFCI Weather/Tamper Resistant GFCI
way around screw and tighten terminal
G5262-x 15A-125V; 60Hz Industrial Grade G5262-Tx 15A-125V; 60Hz Industrial Grade G5262-WTx 15A-125VAC, 60Hz Industrial Grade
clamp on conductor Non-Tamper Resistant GFCI Tamper Resistant GFCI Weather/Tamper Resistant GFCI
ONLY G5362-x 20A-125V; 60Hz Industrial Grade G5362-Tx 20A-125V; 60Hz Industrial Grade G5362-WTx 20A-125VAC, 60Hz Industrial Grade
Non-Tamper Resistant GFCI Tamper Resistant GFCI Weather/Tamper Resistant GFCI
Connect the LINE cable wires to the LINE terminals: All devices rated 20A feed-through
• The white wire connects to the WHITE terminal (Silver)
• The black wire connects to the HOT terminal (Brass or Black) SmartlockPro is a Trademark of Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. registered in the United States, Canada, Mexico and China.
Connect the LINE cable wires to the LINE terminals:
WEB VERSION
Connect the LOAD cable wires to the LOAD terminals:
• The white wire connects to the WHITE terminal (Silver) • Remove the YELLOW sticker to reveal the LOAD terminals LIMITED 2 YEAR WARRANTY AND EXCLUSIONS
Leviton warrants to the original consumer purchaser and not for the benefit of anyone else that this product at the time of its sale by Leviton is free of defects in materials and workmanship
• The black wire connects to the HOT terminal (Brass or Black) • The white wire connects to the WHITE terminal (Silver) under normal and proper use for two years from the purchase date. Leviton’s only obligation is to correct such defects by repair or replacement, at its option. For details visit www.leviton.
Connect the grounding wire (only if there is a grounding wire): com or call 1-800-824-3005. This warranty excludes and there is disclaimed liability for labor for removal of this product or reinstallation. This warranty is void if this product is installed
• The black wire connects to the HOT terminal (Brass or Black) improperly or in an improper environment, overloaded, misused, opened, abused, or altered in any manner, or is not used under normal operating conditions or not in accordance with
• For a box with no grounding terminal (diagram not shown): Connect the Connect the grounding wires (only if there is a grounding wire): any labels or instructions. There are no other or implied warranties of any kind, including merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, but if any implied warranty
is required by the applicable jurisdiction, the duration of any such implied warranty, including merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, is limited to two years. Leviton is
LINE cable's bare copper (or GREEN) wire directly to the grounding • Connect a 6-inch bare copper (or GREEN) 12 or 14 AWG wire to the grounding terminal on the not liable for incidental, indirect, special, or consequential damages, including without limitation, damage to, or loss of use of, any equipment, lost sales or profits or
terminal on the GFCI receptacle. delay or failure to perform this warranty obligation. The remedies provided herein are the exclusive remedies under this warranty, whether based on contract, tort or otherwise.
GFCI. If the box has a grounding terminal, also connect a similar wire to the grounding terminal
• For a box with a grounding terminal (diagram shown above): Connect For Technical Assistance Call: 1-800-824-3005 (U.S.A. Only) 1 800 405-5320 (Canada Only) www.leviton.com
on the box. Connect the ends of these wires to the LINE or LOAD cable's bare copper (or
a 6-inch bare copper (or GREEN) 12 or 14 AWG wire to the grounding GREEN) wire using a wire connector. If these wires are already in place, check the connections. FCC STATEMENT
terminal on the GFCI. Also connect a similar wire to the grounding Complete the installation: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
terminal on the box. Connect the ends of these wires to the LINE cable's • Fold the wires into the box, keeping the grounding wire away from the WHITE and HOT used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
bare copper (or GREEN) wire using a wire connector. terminals. Screw the receptacle to the box and attach the faceplate. to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
If these wires are already in place, check the connections. • Go to step 8. • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Complete the installation:
• Fold the wires into the box, keeping the grounding wire away from the 8. Test your work IC STATEMENT
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
WHITE and HOT terminals. Screw the receptacle to the box and attach Why perform this test?
the faceplate. • If you miswired the GFCI it may not prevent personal injury or death due to a ground fault This product is covered by U.S. Patent Nos. 7,355,117*; 7,697,252; 7,737,809; 7,820,909*; 7,868,719*; 8,004,804; 8,242,362*; 8,587,914; 8,599,522; 9,053,886; 9,077,091
• Go to step 8. (electrical shock). and corresponding foreign patents (*applies only to Cat. Nos. GFTR1, GFTR2, GFWT1, GFWT2, G5262-Tx, G5362-Tx, G5262-WTx, & G5362-WTx).
• If you mistakenly connect the LINE wires to the LOAD terminals, the GFCI will not reset and will
FOR CANADA ONLY
not provide power to either the GFCI receptacle face or any receptacles fed from the GFCI.
For warranty information and/or product returns, residents of Canada should contact Leviton in writing at Leviton Manufacturing of Canada Ltd to the attention of the Quality
Assurance Department, 165 Hymus Blvd, Pointe-Claire (Quebec), Canada H9R 1E9 or by telephone at 1 800 405-5320.
NOTE: LINE and LOAD wiring terminals accept #10 - #14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire. © 2018 Leviton Mfg. Co., Inc. PK-A3080-10-00-2C
ACCESS TO: Front/Rear PHASE: 3P3W
CLASS: 2 AMPERE: 1600A
Cu 1000A/in²
LABEL:
VOLTAGE: 480V
U/L SE BUS MTL:
PLATE: Silver Plate
PBP-1
STYLE: Bolt-On RATING: Fully Rated
BUS BRACING (RMS SYM): 65000A
DEV.MIN.INT.RATING (RMS SYM): 65000A
Switchboard / Device Information

Circuit No. Device Amps Poles Nameplates Lugs/Cable Size Notes
Main SS 1600 3 7,8,9,10,11
1 SELA 125 3 (1) - #12 - 3/0 AWG CU - Mech. AL
5 SKLA8 800 3 (3) - 3/0 - 500 MCM CU - Mech. AL
6 SKLA8 800 3 (3) - 3/0 - 500 MCM CU - Mech. AL
NOTES:
1. Equipment ground bus furnished with lugs.
2. Copper ground bus furnished.
3. Switchboard furnished with Nameplates.
4. All Nameplates to be fastened with screws.
5. Shipping splits between each section, ship each section separately.
6. Switchboard furnished with fully rated panel.
7. Device is 100 percent rated.
8. Device furnished with ETU (LSIG) programmer.
9. Device is furnished with integral ground fault protection.
10. Device furnished with padlocking provisions.
11. Device requires RELT or ZSI feature if Authority having jurisdiction has adopted NEC 2014 code requirements.
12. Estimated total factory connected wiring points for the lineup 4.
13. Estimated shipping weight for the lineup is 1336 lbs.
PROJECT NAME : DWG TITLE: Device Information PRODUCT NAME: DRAWING NO:
ESI WEST ROCK sifuentes,
CREATED BY:carlos cesar enriquez TM ITEM NO: 1
Industrial Spectra Series MARKS: PBP 1
CUSTOMER:
LASER ELECTRICAL Solutions DATE: 01/30/2020 22:57:26 Switchboard QUOTE NO: MX3-00014766
SUPPLIERS INC, EL PASO REVISION NO.: SHEET: 1 of 3
W2 Date:2/24/2020 9:13:11 PM CreatedSSO
Cu 1000A/in²
LABEL: U/L SE BUS MTL:
VOLTAGE: 480V PLATE: Silver Plate
DEV.MIN.INT.RATING (RMS SYM): 65000A
70
30 40
SE UL UL
20 21
2X FILLER
1 2
3 4
5
90 24
SS 6
1600A
Main 7 8
9 BLANK
42 2X FILLER 28X
20
20 21
S 1 S 2
536 lbs 800 lbs

(Est.) (Est.)
FRONT VIEW
1600A
1600A 1600A
NO FUTURE
1600A EXTENSIONS
PROVIDED
BUSSING DIAGRAM
(5) 500 MCM CU
MECHANICAL (1 HOLE) AL
PER PHASE
PROJECT NAME : DWG TITLE: Front View/ Bussing PRODUCT NAME: DRAWING NO:
CUSTOMER:
Cu 1000A/in²
LABEL: U/L SE BUS MTL: 2.5 3.12
VOLTAGE: 480V PLATE: Silver Plate
CONDUIT SPACE
DEV.MIN.INT.RATING (RMS SYM): 65000A (TYPICAL ALL SECTIONS)
.625 DIA
(TYP)
Top Conduit Area
70
30 40
Section 1 Section 2
3
3 3
30 Conduit Area
24D x 34W
Front Plan View
Bottom Conduit Area
70
30 40
3 3
3 3 3 3
30 Conduit Area Conduit Area
24D x 24W 24D x 34W
3 3
Front Plan View
PROJECT NAME : DWG TITLE: Conduit View PRODUCT NAME: DRAWING NO:
CUSTOMER:
PANEL MARKS: SBP 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PANEL TYPE: AQ PANELBOARD SBP-1
QUANTITY: 1
AMPS: 125A
VOLTAGE: 208Y/120V
SYSTEM: 3P4W
KAIC: 10 KAIC SC FULLY RATED
MATERIAL: COPPER BUS
PLATE: NO PLATE
[76.2] [76.2]
ENCLOSURE: NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE
3.0
125A HRZ. NEUTRAL
MOUNTING: SURFACE
SECTION: 1 Horizontal Main THQB 80A/3P
3.0
MAIN DISCONNECT DEVICE
FEED DIR. Top 1 THQB 15A /2P 15A /2P THQB 2
TYPE: Breaker 3 4
25.0 (SHIELD)
AMPS: 80 5 THQB-GFT 20A /1P 20A/1P THQB-GFT 6
[800.1]
[635.0]
CATALOG NO.: THQB32080 7 Space 20A 20A Space 8
31.5
POLES: 3 9 Space 20A 20A Space 10
[304.8]
12.0
11 Space 20A 20A Space 12
LUGS: 1-lug/phase 1-cable/lug #14 -1/0
19 THQB 15A /1P 15A/1P THQB 20
OPTIONS INCLUDED 21 THQB 15A /1P 15A/1P THQB 22
QTY DESCRIPTION 23 THQB 15A /1P 15A/1P THQB 24
1 Copper Bus Heat Rated
2 Ground-Box bonded TGL2
1 Ground main lug TGL20
[107.95]
WBS
4.25
BRANCH DEVICES
QTY AMPS/POLES DESCRIPTION
2 15A /2P THQB2115
6 15A /1P THQB1115 20
2 20A /1P THQB1120GFT [508]
12 20A /1P Space THQB1120
PANEL INFORMATION
INTERIOR AQF3241ATX AXB7
INTERIOR
BOX AB31B
FRONT AF31S
TROUGH
TROUGH END
PULL BOX 1. WBS - WIRE BENDING SPACE. FACTORY AUTO-LAYOUT. THE LAYOUT IS NOT SPECIFIED, THE
DIMENSIONS 31.5"X20"X5.75" 2. DRAWING NOT TO SCALE. FACTORY MAY CHANGE THE LOCATION OF SOME OF THE BREAKERS.
3. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES[mm].
PROJECT NAME : PANEL ID: PRODUCT NAME: DRAWING NO:
ESI WEST ROCK AQ Panelboard ITEM NO: 3
Industrial APPROVED BY:
A SERIES LIGHTING MARKS: SBP 1
CUSTOMER:
LASER ELECTRICAL SU- Solutions DATE: 1/30/2020 10:57:26 PM PANELBOARD QUOTE NO: MX3-00014766
PPLIERS INC, EL PASO REVISION NO. SHEET: 1
VERSION.DATE.TIME
TX-1
15
K1
480
208Y/120
60 Hz
150C
Aluminum
NO
Std (45)
9T10A1001
15
K1
480
208Y/120
60 Hz
150C
Aluminum
NO
Std (45)
9T10A1001
Configure product https://v6.webcomcpq.com/Configurator.aspx
Login
Catalog Home Category » Product Library » AC Drives » HVAC Drives
[ Collapse All ] [ Expand All ] Base Drive Options Other Options Field Kits Drive Details Documentation
Product Library
ACH580-VDR-065A-4
ACH580 6-Pulse drive package rated UL (NEMA) Type 1. Provided with Main Input Disconnect with VFD
fuses and E-Clipse Bypass (Vertical). Rated for 65 amps (50 HP) at 480 VAC three phase.
Technical Data
Input Voltage: 480 VAC Three Phase
Nominal Horsepower: 50 HP
TYPE CODE:
ACH580-VDR-065A-4
Rated Output Current: 65 Amps
Enclosure: UL (NEMA) Type 1

PRODUCT COMPLETE:
Frame Size: R4
Frame Size: R4
Voltage: 480 VAC Three Phase
Bypass: E-Clipse Bypass (Vertical) Horsepower: 50 HP
Enclosure Rating: UL (NEMA) Type 1
Harmonics: 6-Pulse Drive
Input Impedance: 5% equivalent impedance
Disconnect: Disconnect with VFD fuses
Bypass: E-Clipse Bypass (Vertical)
Short Circuit Current Rating: 100 kA with fusing Product: ACH580
Kits & Spares List Prices:

Johnson Controls N2
Communication Protocols: Modbus RTU
BACnet (MS/TP)
Other Options: None
Drive Input Fuse Ratings
Fuse Class Class T
Max Amps (600 V) 90
Wire Size Capacities of Power Terminals
Input Wiring #8…#1/0 ( 4.6 lbf-ft )
Output Wiring #14…#2/0 ( #14...#10: 35 lbf-in; #8...2/0: 110 lbf-in )
Ground Wiring #14…#2 ( #14…#10: 2.9 lbf-ft; #6…#4: 3.8 lbf-ft; #2: 4.1 lbf-ft )
Dimensions and Weights
Dimensions 56.9 in X 8.5 in X 12.1 in

(Height X Width X Depth) (1443 mm X 214 mm X 305 mm)
86 lbs
Weight
(39 kg)
Heat Dissipation
3825 BTU/Hr
Power Losses
(1121 Watts)
134.3 CM/Hr
Airflow
(79 CFM)
SAP CPQ Version 2002.0.4 © 2020 SAP. All rights reserved.
1 de 1 28/02/2020 04:33 p. m.
TAB 8
WARRANTY
Warranty - Maintenance - Service - Monitoring Defined
WARRANTY
Warranty is defined as the initial period of protection when the replacement of a defective component that
prematurely stops functioning properly will be covered at no cost to the equipment owner.
The Warranty Period of one (1) year (Chil-Pak) commences upon start-up, or 6 months from the date of shipment,
whichever occurs first. This Warranty covers the repair or replacement of all parts necessary for repair. The unit
manufacturer (Air Matrix) will provide all necessary component parts and the installing contractor is responsible to
provide all necessary labor. Additionally, the installing contractor is responsible for refrigerant, chemicals, filters and
consumables.
The Warranty Period of five (5) years (Chiller) commences upon start-up, or 6 months from the date of shipment,
whichever occurs first. This Warranty covers the repair or replacement of all parts necessary for repair. The unit
manufacturer (Carrier) will provide all necessary component parts and labor.
The Warranty requires that the EQUIPMENT OWNER performs all maintenance schedules recommended in the
equipment and component O&M’s. All scheduled maintenance must be documented in order to keep the Warranty
valid. See Warranty Validation Letter for further reporting details.
Start-up date TBD

Warranty (Chil-Pak) expires TBD
Warranty (Chiller) expires TBD
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance is defined as periodically checking components for wear to ensure proper function and replenishing
consumable items.
All first year Quarterly Maintenance records of the units and cooling tower will be reviewed by the manufacturer to
ensure equipment is operating in proper limits. All required maintenance is NOT the responsibility of the
manufacturer. The equipment manufacturer is NOT responsible for maintenance labor, refrigerant, chemicals, filters
and consumables.
SERVICE
Service is defined as the actions taken to correct an unexpected problem or condition, sometimes involving a period
of troubleshooting.
Service calls, investigative and/or emergency, are NOT the responsibility of the manufacturer. If the service call
identifies a component failure during the Warranty Period and the Warranty is valid, then see Warranty above for
provisions. Changes to controls after start-up are not covered under the Warranty, therefore charges may apply.
MONITORING
Monitoring is defined as the periodic review of recorded and/or real-time operational data to ensure unit is operating
properly. Some systems have the capability to gather/view data remotely.
Remote monitoring and alarm response is NOT the responsibility of the manufacturer. Troubleshooting and changes
to controls after start-up are not covered under the Warranty, therefore charges may apply.
Project: Eight Flags CCHP, Fernandina Beach, FL

TAB 9
REPORTS / START UP DOCUMENTS

(ETL Letter / MSDS Sheets)
The MSDS format adheres to the standards and regulatory requirements
of the United States and may not meet regulatory requirements
in other countries.
DuPont Page 1
Material Safety Data Sheet
----------------------------------------------------------------------
"SUVA" 134a (AUTO)
2188FR Revised 4-NOV-2002
----------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------
CHEMICAL PRODUCT/COMPANY IDENTIFICATION
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Material Identification
"SUVA" is a trademark of DuPont.
Corporate MSDS Number : DU000693

CAS Number : 811-97-2
Formula : CH2FCF3
CAS Name : 1,1,1,2-TETRAFLUOROETHANE
Tradenames and Synonyms
"SUVA" 134a
HFC 134a
Company Identification
MANUFACTURER/DISTRIBUTOR
DuPont Fluoroproducts
1007 Market Street
Wilmington, DE 19898
PHONE NUMBERS
Product Information : 1-800-441-7515 (outside the U.S.
302-774-1000)
Transport Emergency : CHEMTREC 1-800-424-9300(outside U.S.
703-527-3887)
Medical Emergency : 1-800-441-3637 (outside the U.S.
302-774-1000)
----------------------------------------------------------------------
COMPOSITION/INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Components
Material CAS Number %

ETHANE, 1,1,1,2-TETRAFLUORO- 811-97-2 100
(HFC-134a)
----------------------------------------------------------------------
HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Potential Health Effects
INHALATION
ETHANE, 1,1,1,2-TETRAFLUORO-
2188FR DuPont Page 2
(HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION - Continued)
Gross overexposure may cause: Central nervous system depression

with dizziness, confusion, incoordination, drowsiness or
unconsciousness. Irregular heart beat with a strange sensation in
the chest, "heart thumping", apprehension, lightheadedness,
feeling of fainting, dizziness, weakness, sometimes progressing to
loss of consciousness and death. Suffocation, if air is displaced
by vapors.
SKIN CONTACT
Immediate effects of overexposure may include: Frostbite, if
liquid or escaping vapor contacts the skin.
EYE CONTACT
"Frostbite-like" effects may occur if the liquid or escaping
vapors contact the eyes.
ADDITIONAL HEALTH EFFECTS
Increased susceptibility to the effects of this material may be
observed in persons with pre-existing disease of the: central
nervous system, cardiovascular system.
Carcinogenicity Information
None of the components present in this material at concentrations

equal to or greater than 0.1% are listed by IARC, NTP, OSHA or ACGIH
as a carcinogen.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
FIRST AID MEASURES
----------------------------------------------------------------------
First Aid
INHALATION
If high concentrations are inhaled, immediately remove to fresh

air. Keep person calm. If not breathing, give artificial
respiration. If breathing is difficult, give oxygen. Call a
physician.
SKIN CONTACT
In case of contact, immediately flush skin with plenty of water

for at least 15 minutes, while removing contaminated clothing and
shoes. Call a physician. Wash contaminated clothing before
reuse. Treat for frostbite if necessary by gently warming
affected area.
EYE CONTACT
(FIRST AID MEASURES - Continued)
In case of contact, immediately flush eyes with plenty of water

for at least 15 minutes. Call a physician.
INGESTION
Ingestion is not considered a potential route of exposure.
Notes to Physicians
Because of possible disturbances of cardiac rhythm, catecholamine

drugs, such as epinephrine, should only be used with special
caution in situations of emergency life support.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Flammable Properties
Flash Point : No flash point
Flammable Limits in Air, % by Volume:

LEL : None per ASTM E681
UEL : None per ASTM E681
Autoignition : >743 C(>1369 F)
Fire and Explosion Hazards:
Cylinders may rupture under fire conditions. Decomposition

may occur.
Contact of welding or soldering torch flame with high

concentrations of refrigerant can result in visible changes
in the size and color of torch flames. This flame effect
will only occur in concentrations of product well above the
recommended exposure limit, therefore stop all work and
ventilate to disperse refrigerant vapors from the work area
before using any open flames.
HFC-134a is not flammable in air at temperatures up to

100 deg. C (212 deg. F) at atmospheric pressure. However,
mixtures of HFC-134a with high concentrations of air at
elevated pressure and/or temperature can become combustible
in the presence of an ignition source. HFC-134a can
also become combustible in an oxygen enriched environment
(oxygen concentrations greater than that in air). Whether a
mixture containing HFC-134a and air, or HFC-134a in
an oxygen enriched atmosphere become combustible depends on
the inter-relationship of 1) the temperature 2) the
pressure, and 3) the proportion of oxygen in the mixture. In
general, HFC-134a should not be allowed to exist with
air above atmospheric pressure or at high temperatures; or
in an oxygen enriched environment. For example HFC-134a
should NOT be mixed with air under pressure for leak testing
or other purposes.
(FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES - Continued)
Experimental data have also been reported which indicate

combustibility of HFC-134a in the presence of certain
concentrations of chlorine.
Extinguishing Media
Use media appropriate for surrounding material.
Fire Fighting Instructions
Cool tank/container with water spray. Self-contained breathing

apparatus (SCBA) may be required if cylinders rupture or release
under fire conditions.
Water runoff should be contained and neutralized prior to

release.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Safeguards (Personnel)
NOTE: Review FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES and HANDLING (PERSONNEL)

sections before proceeding with clean-up. Use appropriate
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT during clean-up.
Ventilate area, especially low or enclosed places where heavy

vapors might collect. Remove open flames. Use self-contained
breathing apparatus (SCBA) if large spill or leak occurs.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
HANDLING AND STORAGE
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Handling (Personnel)
Use with sufficient ventilation to keep employee exposure below

recommended limits.
Handling (Physical Aspects)
HFC-134a should not be mixed with air for leak testing or used for
any other purpose above atmospheric pressure. See Flammable
Properties section. Contact with chlorine or other strong
oxidizing agents should also be avoided.
# Storage
Store in a clean, dry place. Do not heat above 52 C (126 F).

(HANDLING AND STORAGE - Continued)
Valve protection caps and valve cutlet threaded plugs must

remain in place unless container is secured with valve
outlet piped to use point. Do NOT drag, slide or roll
cylinders. Use a suitable hand truck for cylinder movement.
Never attempt to lift cylinder by its cap. Use a pressure
reducing regulator when connecting cylinder to lower
pressure (>3000 psig) piping or systems. Do NOT heat
cylinder. Use a check valve or trap in the discharge line
to prevent hazardous back flow into the cylinder.
Cylinders should be stored upright and firmly secured to

prevent falling or being knocked over. Separate full
containers from empty containers. Storage area temperatures
should not exceed 125 deg F (52 deg C) and should be free of
combustible materials. Avoid area where salt or other
corrosive materials are present. Avoid excessive inventory
and storage time. Use a first-in first-out system. Keep
accurate inventory records.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
EXPOSURE CONTROLS/PERSONAL PROTECTION
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Engineering Controls
Normal ventilation for standard manufacturing procedures is

generally adequate. Local exhaust should be used when large
amounts are released. Mechanical ventilation should be used in
low or enclosed places. Refrigerant concentration monitors may be
necessary to determine vapor concentrations in work areas prior to
use of torches or other open flames, or if employees are entering
enclosed areas.
Personal Protective Equipment
Impervious gloves and chemical splash goggles should be used when

handling liquid.
Under normal manufacturing conditions, no respiratory protection

is required when using this product.
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) is required if a large

release occurs.
Exposure Guidelines
Exposure Limits
"SUVA" 134a (AUTO)
PEL (OSHA) : None Established
TLV (ACGIH) : None Established
AEL * (DuPont) : 1000 ppm, 8 & 12 Hr. TWA
WEEL (AIHA) : 1000 ppm, 8 Hr. TWA
* AEL is DuPont’s Acceptable Exposure Limit. Where governmentally

imposed occupational exposure limits which are lower than the AEL
are in effect, such limits shall take precedence.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Physical Data
Boiling Point : -26.5 C (-15.7 F) @ 736 mm Hg

Vapor Pressure : 96 psia @ 25 C (77 F)
Vapor Density : 3.6 (Air=1.0) @ 25 C (77 F)
% Volatiles : 100 WT%
Solubility in Water : 0.15 WT% @ 25 C (77 F)
@ 14.7 psia
Odor : Ether (slight).
Form : Liquified Gas.
Color : Colorless.
Liquid Density : 1.21 g/cm3 @ 25 C (77 F)
Specific Gravity : 1.208 @ 77 F (25 C)
Evaporation Rate : (CCL4 = 1); greater than 1
----------------------------------------------------------------------
STABILITY AND REACTIVITY
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Chemical Stability
Stable.
Conditions to Avoid
Avoid open flames and high temperatures.
Incompatibility with Other Materials
Incompatible with alkali or alkaline earth metals - powdered Al,

Zn, Be, etc.
Decomposition
Decomposition products are hazardous. This material can be

decomposed by high temperatures (open flames, glowing metal
surfaces, etc.) forming hydrofluoric acid and possibly carbonyl
fluoride.
These materials are toxic and irritating. Contact should be

avoided.
(STABILITY AND REACTIVITY - Continued)
Polymerization
Polymerization will not occur.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Animal Data
EYE:
A short duration spray of vapor produced very slight eye

irritation.
SKIN:
Animal testing indicates this material is a slight skin irritant,

but not a skin sensitizer.
INHALATION:
4 hour, ALC, rat: 567,000 ppm.
Single exposure caused: Cardiac sensitization, a potentially fatal

disturbance of heart rhythm associated with a heightened
sensitivity to the action of epinephrine.
Lowest-Observed-Adverse-Effect-Level for cardiac sensitization:
75,000 ppm. Single exposure caused: Lethargy. Narcosis.
Increased respiratory rates. These effects were temporary.
Single exposure to near lethal doses caused: Pulmonary edema.
Repeated exposure caused: Increased adrenals, liver, spleen
weight. Decreased uterine, prostate weight. Repeated dosing of
higher concentrations caused: the following temporary effects -
Tremors. Incoordination.
CARCINOGENIC, DEVELOPMENTAL, REPRODUCTIVE, MUTAGENIC EFFECTS:
In a two-year inhalation study, HFC-134a, at a concentration of

50,000 ppm, produced an increase in late-occurring benign
testicular tumors, testicular hyperplasia and testicular weight.
The no-effect-level for this study was 10,000 ppm. Animal data
show slight fetotoxicity but only at exposure levels producing
other toxic effects in the adult animal. Reproductive data on
male mice show: No change in reproductive performance. Tests have
shown that this material does not cause genetic damage in
bacterial or mammalian cell cultures, or in animals. In animal
testing, this material has not caused permanent genetic damage in
reproductive cells of mammals (has not produced heritable genetic
damage).
----------------------------------------------------------------------
ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Ecotoxicological Information
AQUATIC TOXICITY:
48 hour EC50 - Daphnia magna: 980 mg/L.
96 hour LC50 - Rainbow trout: 450 mg/L
----------------------------------------------------------------------
DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Waste Disposal
Contaminated HFC-134a can be recovered by distillation or removed

to a permitted waste disposal facility. Comply with Federal,
State, and local regulations.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
TRANSPORTATION INFORMATION
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Shipping Information
DOT/IMO
Proper Shipping Name : 1,1,1,2-TETRAFLUOROETHANE
Hazard Class : 2.2
UN No. : 3159
DOT/IMO Label : NONFLAMMABLE GAS
Shipping Containers
Tank Cars.
Tank Trucks.
Ton Tanks.
Cylinders.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
REGULATORY INFORMATION
----------------------------------------------------------------------
U.S. Federal Regulations
TSCA Inventory Status : Reported/Included.
TITLE III HAZARD CLASSIFICATIONS SECTIONS 311, 312
Acute : Yes
Chronic : Yes
Fire : No
Reactivity : No
Pressure : Yes
HAZARDOUS CHEMICAL LISTS
SARA Extremely Hazardous Substance: No

CERCLA Hazardous Substance : No
SARA Toxic Chemical : No
----------------------------------------------------------------------
OTHER INFORMATION
----------------------------------------------------------------------
NFPA, NPCA-HMIS
NPCA-HMIS Rating
Health : 1
Flammability : 0
Reactivity : 1
Personal Protection rating to be supplied by user depending on use

conditions.
Additional Information
MEDICAL USE: CAUTION: Do not use in medical applications

involving permanent implantation in the human body. For other
medical applications see DuPont CAUTION Bulletin No. H-50102.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
The data in this Material Safety Data Sheet relates only to the
specific material designated herein and does not relate to use in
combination with any other material or in any process.
Responsibility for MSDS : MSDS Coordinator

> : DuPont Fluoroproducts
Address : Wilmington, DE 19898
Telephone : (800) 441-7515
# Indicates updated section.
This information is based upon technical information believed to be

reliable. It is subject to revision as additional knowledge and
experience is gained.
End of MSDS

Horn Strobe PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Horn Strobe PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TAB NUMBER SECTION NAME

1 Data Sheet / Component List

2 Scope of Work by Contractor

4 Chiller, Pump Performance, and Heat Exchanger

5 Cooling Tower Selection & Related Components (BY OTHERS)

7 Controls & Related Components / Sequence of Operation

8 Warranty / Validation Letter / Start Up Documents

Project: Eight Flags CCHP- Fernandina Beach, FL

DATA SHEET / COMPONENT LIST

COOLING TOWER (If Optional ADD #4 taken)

Page 1 of 3 Project: Eight Flags Energy – Fernandina Beach, FL

UNIT CONSTRUCTION SUMMARY

SPECIFIED INTERNAL COMPONENTS

Page 2 of 3 Project: Eight Flags Energy – Fernandina Beach, FL

Page 3 of 3 Project: Eight Flags Energy – Fernandina Beach, FL

COMPONENTS BRAND MODEL

Chillers Carrier 19XRV6Z6647DLFH64

Pumps Armstrong 4030 Series

Cooling Tower Marley By Others

Electric Panels General Electric Various Spectra Series

Exhaust Fan Greenheck SQ-160-A

Refrigerant Monitor & Alarm Sherlock SHER102

Variable Frequency Drives ABB ACH550-UH

Pot Feeders GTP FB5/QC-AC

Air Separator Armstrong VA-8

Expansion Tanks Armstrong A-400L

Strainer Gruvlok Model 768G Wye Strainer

Butterfly Valves Gruvlok Series 7700

Suction Guides Gruvlok Figure 7250

BAS Interface By Others

Heat Exchangers Mueller AT80MH/HV

Control Valves Belimo Various

Project: Job Name – City, State

SCOPE OF WORK BY CONTRACTOR

(Page 1 of 2 ) Project: Eight Flags CCHP – Fernandina Beach, FL

Building Controls ~ Integration

(Page 2 of 2 ) Project: Eight Flags CCHP – Fernandina Beach, FL

CHIL-PAK UNIT, PIPING & ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS

a) Plan & Elevation View (MH-100)

CHILLER, PUMPS, HEAT EXCHANGERS

Tag Name: 425 Tons XRV_Sel01

Rated with AHRI Standard 550/590 (I-P)

AquaEdge Chiller Builder v5.01 Page 1 of 2

AquaEdge Chiller Builder v5.01 Page 2 of 2

Operating Conditions Liquid

JAMES, COOKE AND HOBSON INC. PHONE: · FAX:

General Arrangement Drawing

Pump Materials of Construction

Operating Conditions Liquid

JAMES, COOKE AND HOBSON INC. PHONE: · FAX:

General Arrangement Drawing

Pump Materials of Construction

Quantity Description Unit Price Total Price

1 189238-01.04 $34,550.00 $34,550.00

Approximate shipping weight: 7894 LB.

CC: Fernie Jasso Signed By:

Design Data Hot Side Cold Side

NUMBER PLATE GASKET STYLE / PLATE PART

PICTORIAL VIEW AND TERMINOLOGY FOR PLATES AND GASKETS

80M H-L 80M H-R 80M H-LF 80M H-RF

L = LEFT HAND R = RIGHT HAND

COMPONENTS NOT MANUFACTURED BY THE COMPANY

* WARNING – BEFORE YOU GET STARTED *